Joomla! Documentation - User contributions [en]

Help5.x:Contacts: Edit Category

2024-04-07T21:26:43Z

Heelc29: add help J5.1

<noinclude><languages /></noinclude>
<translate>

==Description== 
Contact Categories allow you to organize contacts in your web site. Contact Categories are separate from other types of Categories, such as those for Articles, Banners, News Feeds, and so on.

==How to Access== 
*Select {{rarr|Components,Contacts,Categories}} from the Administrator menu. Then...
**Select the '''New''' button in Toolbar to create a new category. Or...
**Select a category title in the Title column to '''Edit''' an existing category.

==Screenshot== 
:[[File:Help-4x-Components-Contact-Categories-Edit-screen-en.png|800px]]

==Form Fields== 
{{Chunk4x:colheader|Enter Title/en}}
{{Chunk4x:colheader|Alias/en}}
{{anchor|content}}

===Category Tab=== 
'''Left Panel'''
{{Chunk4x:colheader|Description/en}}


'''Right Panel'''
*'''Parent.''' The item (category, menu item, and so on) that is the parent of the item being edited.
*'''Status.''' (Published/Unpublished/Archived/Trashed) The published status of the item.
*'''Access Level.''' Who has access to this item. Default options are:
**'''Public:''' Everyone has access
**'''Guest:''' Everyone has access
**'''Registered:''' Only registered users have access
**'''Special:''' Only users with author status or higher have access
**'''Super Users:''' Only super users have access
***Enter the desired level using the dropdown list box. Custom Access Control Levels created will show if they exist.
*'''Language.''' Item language.
*'''Tags.''' Enter one or more optional tags for this item. You can select existing tags by entering in the first few letters. You may also create new tags by entering them here. Tags allow you to see lists of related items across content types (for example, articles, contacts, and categories).
*'''Note.''' Item note. This is normally for the site administrator's use (for example, to document information about this item) and does not show in the front end of the site.
*'''Version Note.''' Optional field to identify this version of the item in the item's [[Help40:Components_Version_History/en|Version History]] window.
{{anchor|options}}

===Options Tab=== 
[[File:Help-4x-Categories-Edit-screen-options-tab-en.png|600px]]
*'''Layout.''' Use a different layout from the supplied components view or overrides in the templates.
*'''Image.''' Choose an image to be displayed with this item/category in the front-end.
*'''Alt Text.''' Alternative text used for visitors without access to images.
{{anchor|publishing}}

===Publishing Tab=== 
[[File:Help-4x-Categories-Edit-screen-publish-options-tab-en.png|600px]]


The grayed out fields are for information only and may not be edited.
*'''Created Date.''' Date the item(Article, Category, Weblink, etc.) was created.
*'''Created by.''' Optional, choose from a popup window of users. Select User by clicking on the user's name. Defaults to user creating new category if left blank.
*'''Modified Date.''' ''(Informative only)'' Date of last modification.
*'''Modified By.''' ''(Informative only)'' Username who performed the last modification.
*'''Hits.''' Number of hits on a Category view.
*'''ID.''' The unique ID number automatically assigned to this item by Joomla!. This number cannot be changed.
*'''Meta Description.''' An optional paragraph to be used as the description of the page in the HTML output. This will generally display in the results of search engines. If entered, this creates an HTML meta element with a name attribute of "description" and a content attribute equal to the entered text.
*'''Meta Keywords.''' Optional entry for keywords. Must be entered separated by commas (for example, "cats, dogs, pets") and may be entered in upper or lower case. (For example, "CATS" will match "cats" or "Cats"). Keywords can be used in several ways:
**To help Search Engines and other systems classify the content of the Article.
**In combination with Banner tags, to display specific Banners based on the Article content. For example, say you have one Banner with an ad for dog products and another Banner for cat products. You can have your dog Banner display when a User is viewing a dog-related Article and your cat Banner display for a cat-related Article. To do this, you would:
***Add the keywords 'dog' and 'cat' to the appropriate Articles.
***Add the Tags 'dog' and 'cat' to the appropriate Banners in the [[Help40:Banners:_Edit/en|Banner Manager New/Edit]] screen.
***Set the Banner module Parameter 'Search By Tags' to 'Yes in the [[Help40:Site_Modules:_Banners/en|Banner Module Edit]] screen.
**For articles only, in combination with the [[Help40:Site_Modules:_Articles_-_Related/en|Related Articles]] module, to display Articles that share at least one keyword in common. For example, if the current Article displayed has the keywords "cats, dogs, monkeys", any other Articles with at least one of these keywords will show in the Related Articles module.
*'''Author.''' Optional entry for an Author name within the metadata. If entered, this creates an HTML meta element with the name attribute of "author" and the content attribute as entered here.
*'''Robots.''' The instructions for web "robots" that browse to this page.
**''Use Global'': Use the value set in the Component→Options for this component.
**''Index, Follow'': Index this page and follow the links on this page.
**''No index, Follow'': Do not index this page, but still follow the links on the page. For example, you might do this for a site map page where you want the links to be indexed but you don't want this page to show in search engines.
**''Index, No follow'': Index this page, but do not follow any links on the page. For example, you might want to do this for an events calendar, where you want the page to show in search engines but you do not want to index each event.
**''No index, no follow'': Do not index this page or follow any links on the page.
{{anchor|associations}}

===Associations Tab=== 
[[File:Help-4x-Categories-Edit-screen-publish-associations-tab-en.png|600px]]
{{anchor|permissions}}

===Permissions Tab=== 
:[[File:Help-4x-Categories-Edit-screen-permissions-tab-en.png|600px]]
{{Chunk4x:Change_Permissions/en}}

==Toolbar== 
{{:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_top_descriptor/en}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Save/en}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_SaveAndClose/en}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_SaveAndNew/en}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_SaveAsCopy/en}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Cancel/en}} Or
{{:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Close/en}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Versions/en}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Associations/en}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Help/en}}

==Related Information== 
To find and edit existing Contacts: [[Help40:Contacts/en|Contact Manager]].

</translate>
{{Cathelp|5.0,5.1|Contact Manager Help Screens|Components Help Screens}}

Help5.x:Contacts: Edit

2024-04-07T21:26:35Z

Heelc29: add help J5.1

<noinclude><languages /></noinclude>
<translate>

==Description== 
Contacts allow you to list people and their personal information on your web site, not necessarily registered users. You may also allow anyone, or just registered users, to send e-mails to those people. The Edit Form is where you add a new Contact or edit an existing Contact.


'''Be aware:''' If a contact has a menu item then the Contact Menu Settings override some settings available here. Be careful not to disclose personal information by mistake!

==How to Access== 
*Select {{rarr|Components,Contacts,Contacts}} in the Administrator menu. Then...
*To '''Add''' a new Contact:
**Select the '''New''' button in the Toolbar.
*To '''Edit''' an existing Contact:
**Select a contact title in the '''Title''' column.

==Screenshot== 
[[File:Help-4x-Components-Contacts-Contacts-Edit-screen-en.png|800px]]

==Form Fields== 
In this section, you can enter information about the Contact, such as name, address, e-mail, and so on. The options allow you to control settings such as what information gets displayed for each Contact.
*'''Name.''' The full name of the Contact.
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Alias/en}}
{{anchor|content}}

===Edit Contact=== 
Here you enter the basic information about the contact.
*'''Linked User.''' Select the User, if any, that this Contact is linked to from the drop-down list box. This allows you to link this Contact's information to a registered Joomla! User. If this Contact is not linked to a User, select "-No User-".
*'''Image.''' Image to display for this Contact. Select an image file from the drop-down list box. This lists images in the 'images/stories' folder. Images can be uploaded using the [[Help40:Media/en|Media Manager]].
*'''Position:''' The Contact's current position.
*'''E-mail.''' The Contact's e-mail address. Note that e-mail addresses in Joomla! can be protected from "spambots" by enabling "Content-Email Cloaking" in the [[Help40:Plugins/en|Plug-in Manager]]. This is enabled by default.
*'''Address.''' The Contact's street address.
*'''City or Suburb.''' The Contact's town or suburb.
*'''State or Province.''' The Contact's state or county.
*'''Postal / ZIP Code.''' The Contact's postal code.
*'''Country.''' The Contact's country.
*'''Telephone.''' The Contact's phone number.
*'''Mobile.''' The Contact's mobile phone number.
*'''Fax.''' The Contact's fax number.
*'''Website.''' The Contact's web site address.
*'''Sort Fields.''' To enable sort fields for Category lists go to the {{rarr|Contacts,Options}} screen and set {{rarr|List Layouts,Sort By}} to '''Sort Name'''. Then you need to use real words for sorting. For example, set First Sort Field to '''Doe''', second field to '''John''' for the first contact; then First Sort Field to '''Doe''', second field to '''Jane''' for the second contact. The third field is not used in this case. The sort fields are character fields so if you want to sort by age you need to enter 0x for ages under 10, so 08 for example.
**'''First Sort Field.''' The name to use as the first sort field.
**'''Second Sort Field.''' The name to use as the second sort field.
**'''Third Sort Field.''' The name to use as the third sort field.
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header State/en}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Category/en}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Featured/en}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Access/en}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Language/en}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Tags/en}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Version Note/en}}
{{anchor|miscellaneousinformation}}

===Miscellaneous Information=== 
[[File:Help-4x-Components-Contacts-Contacts-Edit-Miscellaneous-Information-Tab-en.png|600px]]


Other information about this Contact can be entered using the editor.
{{anchor|display}}

===Display=== 
[[File:Help-4x-Components-Contacts-Contacts-Edit-Display-Options-Tab-en.png|600px]]
*'''Show Category.''' Show or hide the Contact's category.
*'''Show Contact List.''' Show or hide the Contact list.
*'''Display format.''' Determines the style used to display sections of the contact form.
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Show Tags/en}}
*'''Contact Information.''' Hide or Show the Contact information.
*'''Miscellaneous Information.''' Hide or Show the Miscellaneous information.
*'''vCard.''' Hide or Show the vCard link for this Contact.
*'''Show User Articles.''' If this contact is mapped to a user, and if this is set to Show, then a list of articles created by this user will show.
*'''# Articles to List.''' Number of articles to list.
*'''User Profile.''' If this contact is mapped to a user, and if this is set to Show, then the profile of this user will show.
*'''Show User Custom Field Groups.''' Show user custom fields which belong to all or only selected field groups.
*'''Contact Links.''' Show or hide the contact links.
*'''Link A Label.''' Label for an additional link for this contact.
*'''Link A URL.''' The additional link URL for this contact.
*'''Link B Label.''' Label for an additional link for this contact.
*'''Link B URL.''' The additional link URL for this contact.
*'''Link C Label.''' Label for an additional link for this contact.
*'''Link C URL.''' The additional link URL for this contact.
*'''Link D Label.''' Label for an additional link for this contact.
*'''Link D URL.''' The additional link URL for this contact.
*'''Link E Label.''' Label for an additional link for this contact.
*'''Link E URL.''' The additional link URL for this contact.
*'''Layout.''' Use a different layout from the supplied component view or overrides in the templates.
{{anchor|form}}

===Form=== 
[[File:Help-4x-Components-Contacts-Contacts-Edit-Form-Options-Tab-en.png|600px]]
*'''Contact Form.''' Hide or Show the E-mail form. If Show is selected, a form is displayed that allows the user to send an e-mail to the Contact from the web site.
*'''Send Copy to Submitter.''' Hide or Show the checkbox: 'E-mail a copy of this message to your own address.'
*'''Session Check.''' Check for the existence of session cookie. This means that users without cookies enabled will not be able to send emails.
*'''Custom Reply.''' Turns off the automated reply, allowing for Plugins to handle integration with other systems.
*'''Contact Redirect.''' Enter an alternative url, where user will be redirected to after the mail is sent.
{{anchor|publishing}}

===Publishing=== 
[[File:Help-4x-Components-Contacts-Contacts-Edit-Publishing-Options-Tab-en.png|600px]]


{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Start Publishing/en}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Finish Publishing/en}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Enter Created Date/en}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Enter Created By/en}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Enter Created By Alias/en}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Modified Date/en}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Modified By/en}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Revision/en}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Hits/en}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Id/en}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Metadata Description/en}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Metadata Keywords/en}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Metadata Robots/en}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Content Rights/en}}
{{anchor|associations}}

===Associations=== 
[[File:Help-4x-Components-Contacts-Contacts-Edit-Associations-Tab-en.png|600px]]

==Toolbar== 
{{:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_top_descriptor/en}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Save/en|contact}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_SaveAndClose/en|contact}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_SaveAndNew/en|contact}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_SaveAsCopy/en|contact}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Cancel/en}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Close/en}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Versions/en|contact}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Associations/en}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Help/en}}

==Quick Tips== 
At least one Contact Category must be added ''before'' adding the first Contact.

==Related Information== 

{| class="wikitable"
|-
! Related Help Screens !! Description
|-
| [[Help40:Contacts:_Categories/en|Contacts: Categories]] || The Contact Category Manager is where you can edit existing Contact Categories and create new ones. Note that Contact Categories are separate from other Categories, such as for Articles, Banners, News Feeds, and Web Links. From this screen, you can also navigate to the[[Help40:Components_Contacts_Contacts/en|Contact Manager: Contacts]] screen.
|-
| [[Help40:Contacts:_Edit_Category/en|Contacts: Edit Category]]|| This is where you can add a Contact Category or edit an existing Contact Category. Contact Categories allow you to organize contacts in your web site. Contact Categories are separate from other types of Categories, such as those for Articles, Banners, News Feeds, and so on.
|-
| [[Help40:Contacts/en|Contacts]] || The Contact Manager screen allows you to add contact information to your Joomla! site. You can enter information such as name, address, phone and e-mail. You can also link contacts to registered users. Afterwards, you can use the [[Help40:Menus_Menu_Manager/en|Menu Manager]] to create front-end links to the the contacts.
|-
|}

</translate>
{{Cathelp|5.0,5.1|Components Help Screens}}

Help5.x:Contacts: Categories

2024-04-07T21:26:26Z

Heelc29: add help J5.1

Help5.x:Contacts

2024-04-07T21:26:18Z

Heelc29: add help J5.1

<noinclude><languages /></noinclude>
<translate>

==Description== 
The Contacts list shows selected information for contacts and provides links to edit or add information such as name, address, phone and e-mail. You can also link contacts to registered users. Afterwards, you can use the [[Help40:Menus/en|Menu Manager]] to create front-end links to the the contacts.

==How to access== 
* Select {{rarr|Components,Contacts,Contacts}} from the Administrator menu. Or...
* Select the numbered button in the [[Help40:Contacts:_Categories/en|Category Manager: Contacts]] screen.

==Screenshot== 
[[Image:Help-4x-Components-Contacts-Contacts-screen-en.png|800px]]

==Column Headers== 
Click on the column heading to sort the list by that column's value.
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Checkbox/en}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Order/en}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Featured/en}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Status/en}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Title/en}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Linked User/en}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Access/en}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Language/en}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Id/en}}

==List Filters== 
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen filters Search Bar Filter/en}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Select Featured/en}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Select Status/en}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Select Category/en}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Select Access/en}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Select Language/en}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Select Tag/en}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Select Max Levels/en}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help_screen_filters_Pagination/en}}

==Toolbar== 
At the top of the page you will see the toolbar shown in the [[#Screenshot|Screenshot]] above. The functions are:
*'''New'''. Opens the editing screen to create a new contact.
*'''Actions:''' Reveals a list of actions for selected Items. Check one or more Item checkboxes to activate the list.
<ul>
*'''Publish'''. Makes the selected contact available to visitors to your website.
*'''Unpublish.''' Makes the selected contact unavailable to visitors to your website.
*'''Feature.''' Marks selected contact as featured. Works with one or multiple contact selected.
*'''Unfeature.''' Changes the status of featured articles to unfeatured. Works with one or multiple articles selected.
*'''Archive'''. Changes the status of the selected contact to indicate that they are archived. {{-}}Archived contact can be moved back to the published or unpublished state by selecting 'Archived' in the 'Select Status' filter and changing the status of the contact.
*'''Check-In'''. Checks-in the selected contact. Works with one or multiple contact selected.
*'''Batch'''. Batch processes the selected contact. Works with one or multiple items selected.
*'''Trash'''. Changes the status of the selected contact to indicate that they are trashed.{{-}}Trashed contact can still be recovered by selecting 'Trashed' in the 'Select Status' filter and changing the status of the articles to Published or Unpublished as preferred.{{-}}To permanently delete trashed contact, select 'Trashed' in the 'Select Status' filter, select the contact to be permanently deleted, then click the 'Empty Trash' toolbar icon.
</ul>
*'''Options.''' Opens the Options window where settings such as default parameters can be edited.
*'''Help'''. Opens this help screen.

==Quick Tips== 
*You need to add at least one Category for your Contacts ''before'' you can add your first Contact. Categories are added using the [[Help40:Components_Contacts_Categories/en|Category Manager: Contacts]] screen.

==Related Information== 



{| class="wikitable"
|-
! Related Help Screens !! Description
|-
| [[Help40:Contacts:_Categories/en|Contacts: Categories]] || The Contact Category Manager is where you can edit existing Contact Categories and create new ones. Note that Contact Categories are separate from other Categories, such as for Articles, Banners, News Feeds, and Web Links. From this screen, you can also navigate to the [[Help40:Components_Contacts_Contacts/en|Contact Manager: Contacts]] screen.
|-
| [[Help40:Contacts:_New_or_Edit_Category/en|Contacts: New or Edit Category]] || This is where you can add a Contact Category or edit an existing Contact Category. Contact Categories allow you to organize contacts in your web site. Contact Categories are separate from other types of Categories, such as those for Articles, Banners, News Feeds, and so on.
|-
| [[Help40:Contacts:_New_or_Edit/en|Contacts: New or Edit]] || This is where you can add a Contact or edit an existing Contact. Contacts allow you to list people on your web site. They also allow users to send e-mails to those people.
|}

</translate>
{{Cathelp|5.0,5.1|Components Help Screens}}

Help5.x:Banners: Tracks

2024-04-07T21:25:37Z

Heelc29: add help J5.1

<noinclude><languages /></noinclude>
<translate>

==Description== 
Used to view a list of existing Banner Tracking information.

==How to Access== 
* Select {{rarr|Components,Banners,Tracks}}

==Screenshot== 
[[Image:Help-4x-Components-Banners-Tracks-screen-en.png|800px]]

==Column Headers== 
Click on a column heading to sort the list by that column's value.
*'''Name.''' The name and category of the banner.
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Client/en}}
*'''Type.''' The type of the track. This is an impression or a click.
*'''Count.''' Number of impressions or clicks.
*'''Date.''' Date and hour of the impression or click.

==List Filters== 
Near the top of the page you will see the filter bar shown in the Screenshot above. The functions are:
{{Chunk4x:Help screen filters Search Bar Filter/en}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Select Category/en}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Select Client/en}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Select Track Type/en}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Select Max Levels/en}}
'''Begin and End date.'''
*'''Begin date.''' The startingdate of the tracks to list.
*'''End date.''' The enddate of the tracks to list.
{{:Chunk4x:Help_screen_filters_Pagination/en}}

==Toolbar== 
At the top of the page you will see the toolbar shown in the [[#Screenshot|Screenshot]] above. The functions are:
*'''Export'''. Opens a window where you will be able export the Banner Tracks.
*'''Delete Tracks'''. Will delete the selected Banner Tracks.
*'''Options.''' Opens the Options window where settings such as default parameters can be edited.
*'''Help'''. Opens this help screen.
See [[Help40:Articles:_Options/en|Article Manager Options]] for more information.

==Quick Tips== 
* You must add at least one Banner Client and Banner Category ''before'' you can add a Banner.

</translate>
{{Cathelp|5.0,5.1|Banner Manager Help Screens|Components Help Screens}}

Help5.x:Banners: New or Edit Client

2024-04-07T21:25:30Z

Heelc29: add help J5.1

<noinclude><languages /></noinclude>
<translate>

==Description== 
This is where you add a new Banner Client or edit an existing one. Note that you need to create at least one Banner Client before you can create a Banner.

==How to Access== 
* Select {{rarr|Components,Banners,Clients}} in the Administrator menu.
** To create a new Client click the New button in the Toolbar.
** To edit an existing Client click the name in the Client column.

==Screenshot== 
[[Image:Help-4x-Components-Banners-Clients-Edit-screen-en.png|800px]]

==Form Fields== 
*'''Name.''' The name of this client.

===Details Tab=== 
*'''Contact Name.''' The name of the contact person for this client.
*'''Contact E-mail.''' The e-mail address of the banner client.
*'''Purchase Type.''' The purchase type of the banner. This is used to indicate how the banner client purchased the display time for the banner - monthly, yearly, etc...
*'''Track Impressions.''' Whether or not to track the number of times the banner is displayed to web site visitors.
*'''Track Clicks.''' Whether or not to track the number of times the banner is clicked by web site visitors.
*'''Additional Information.''' Enter any extra information you want to save for this client.
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header State/en}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Version Note/en}}

===Metadata Tab=== 
[[Image:Help-4x-Components-Banners-Clients-Edit-screen-metadata-en.png]]
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Metadata Keywords/en}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Use Own Prefix/en}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Meta Keyword Prefix/en}}

==Toolbar== 
At the top of the page you will see the toolbar shown in the [[#Screenshot|Screenshot]] above. The functions are:
*'''Save'''. Saves the item and stays in the current screen.
*'''Save & Close'''. Saves the item and closes the current screen.
*'''Save & New'''. Saves the item and keeps the editing screen open and ready to create another item.
*'''Save as Copy'''. Saves your changes to a copy of the current item. Does not affect the current item. This toolbar icon is not shown if you are creating a new item.
*'''Cancel'''. Closes the current screen and returns to the previous screen without saving any modifications you may have made. Or
*'''Close'''. Closes the current screen and returns to the previous screen without saving any modifications you may have made. This toolbar icon is not shown if you are creating a new item.
*'''Versions'''. Opens the Item Version History window to show any prior versions of this item. This allows you to view older versions of this item and, if desired, restore from an older version. See [[S:MyLanguage/Help40:Components_Version_History{{#translation:}}|Version History]] for more information.
*'''Help'''. Opens this help screen.

==Related Information== 
* To create or edit Banners: [[Help40:Banners:_Edit/en|Banner - New/Edit]]
* To work with Banner Categories: [[Help40:Banners:_Categories/en|Banner Category Manager]]
* To place Banners on Pages: [[Help40:Modules/en|Module Manager]]

</translate>
{{Cathelp|5.0,5.1|Banner Manager Help Screens|Components Help Screens}}

Help5.x:Banners: New or Edit Category

2024-04-07T21:25:21Z

Heelc29: add help J5.1

<noinclude><languages /></noinclude>
<translate>

==Description== 
This is where you can add a new Banner Category or edit an existing one. Note that you need to create at least one Banner Category before you can create a Banner. Also, Banner Categories are separate from other types of Categories, such as those for Articles, Contacts, and News Feeds.

==How to Access== 
Navigate to the [[Help40:Banners:_Categories/en|Banner Category Manager]], {{rarr|Components,Banners,Categories}}
* '''New'''. Click on '''New''' icon in toolbar.
* '''Edit'''. To edit an existing Banner Category, click on the '''Category's Name''' in the table of categories.

==Screenshot== 
[[Image:Help-4x-Components-Banners-Categories-Edit-screen-en.png|800px]]

==Form Fields== 
{{Chunk4x:Colheader Enter Title/en}}
{{Chunk4x:Help_screen_column_header_Alias/en}}

===Details Tab=== 
'''Left panel'''
{{Chunk4x:colheader|Description/en}}
'''Right Panel'''
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Parent/en}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Enter Status/en}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Enter Access/en}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Enter Language/en}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Enter Tags/en}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Note/en}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Version Note/en}}

==Options Tab== 
*'''Layout.''' Select a layout from the list.
*'''Image.''' Optional: Select an image to display alongside this Category.
*'''Alt Text.''' Alternative text for the icon - often used by screen readers.

==Publishing Tab== 
[[File:Help-4x-Banners-Categories-Edit-screen-publish-options-tab-en.png|600px]]

===Publishing=== 
The grayed out fields are for information only and may not be edited.
*'''Created Date.''' Date the item(Article, Category, Weblink, etc.) was created.
*'''Created by.''' Optional, choose from a popup window of users. Select User by clicking on the user's name. Defaults to user creating new category if left blank.
*'''Modified Date.''' ''(Informative only)'' Date of last modification.
*'''Modified By.''' ''(Informative only)'' Username who performed the last modification.
*'''Hits.''' Number of hits on a Category view.
*'''ID.''' The unique ID number automatically assigned to this item by Joomla!. This number cannot be changed.
*'''Meta Description.''' An optional paragraph to be used as the description of the page in the HTML output. This will generally display in the results of search engines. If entered, this creates an HTML meta element with a name attribute of "description" and a content attribute equal to the entered text.
*'''Meta Keywords.''' Optional entry for keywords. Must be entered separated by commas (for example, "cats, dogs, pets") and may be entered in upper or lower case. (For example, "CATS" will match "cats" or "Cats"). Keywords can be used in several ways:
**To help Search Engines and other systems classify the content of the Article.
**In combination with Banner tags, to display specific Banners based on the Article content. For example, say you have one Banner with an ad for dog products and another Banner for cat products. You can have your dog Banner display when a User is viewing a dog-related Article and your cat Banner display for a cat-related Article. To do this, you would:
***Add the keywords 'dog' and 'cat' to the appropriate Articles.
***Add the Tags 'dog' and 'cat' to the appropriate Banners in the [[Help40:Banners:_Edit/en|Banner Manager New/Edit]] screen.
***Set the Banner module Parameter 'Search By Tags' to 'Yes in the [[Help40:Site_Modules:_Banners/en|Banner Module Edit]] screen.
**For articles only, in combination with the [[Help40:Site_Modules:_Articles_-_Related/en|Related Articles]] module, to display Articles that share at least one keyword in common. For example, if the current Article displayed has the keywords "cats, dogs, monkeys", any other Articles with at least one of these keywords will show in the Related Articles module.
*'''Author.''' Optional entry for an Author name within the metadata. If entered, this creates an HTML meta element with the name attribute of "author" and the content attribute as entered here.
*'''Robots.''' The instructions for web "robots" that browse to this page.
**''Use Global'': Use the value set in the Component→Options for this component.
**''Index, Follow'': Index this page and follow the links on this page.
**''No index, Follow'': Do not index this page, but still follow the links on the page. For example, you might do this for a site map page where you want the links to be indexed but you don't want this page to show in search engines.
**''Index, No follow'': Index this page, but do not follow any links on the page. For example, you might want to do this for an events calendar, where you want the page to show in search engines but you do not want to index each event.
**''No index, no follow'': Do not index this page or follow any links on the page.

==Permissions Tab== 
[[File:Help-4x-Banners-Categories-Edit-screen-permissions-tab-en.png|600px]]
{{Chunk4x:Change_Permissions/en}}

==Toolbar== 
At the top of the page you will see the toolbar shown in the [[#Screenshot|Screenshot]] above. The functions are:
*'''Save'''. Saves the item and stays in the current screen.
*'''Save & Close'''. Saves the item and closes the current screen.
*'''Save & New'''. Saves the item and keeps the editing screen open and ready to create another item.
*'''Save as Copy'''. Saves your changes to a copy of the current item. Does not affect the current item. This toolbar icon is not shown if you are creating a new item.
*'''Cancel'''. Closes the current screen and returns to the previous screen without saving any modifications you may have made. Or
*'''Close'''. Closes the current screen and returns to the previous screen without saving any modifications you may have made. This toolbar icon is not shown if you are creating a new item.
*'''Versions'''. Opens the Item Version History window to show any prior versions of this item. This allows you to view older versions of this item and, if desired, restore from an older version. See [[S:MyLanguage/Help40:Components_Version_History{{#translation:}}|Version History]] for more information.
*'''Associations'''. With a specific language set for an item, allows side by side editing in another language. This toolbar icon is shown on [[S:MyLanguage/Help4.x:Multilingual_Associations{{#translation:}}|Multilingual Sites]] only.
*'''Help'''. Opens this help screen.

==Related Information== 
* To create or edit Banners: [[Help40:Banners:_Categories/en|Banner Category Manager - New/Edit]]
* To work with Banner Clients: [[Help40:Banners:_Clients/en|Banner Client Manager]]
* To place Banners on Pages: [[Help40:Modules/en|Module Manager]]

</translate>
{{Cathelp|5.0,5.1|Banner Manager Help Screens|Components Help Screens}}

Help5.x:Banners: Edit

2024-04-07T21:25:11Z

Heelc29: add help J5.1

<noinclude><languages /></noinclude>
<translate>

==Description== 
Used to add or edit banners which can be displayed on your Joomla! website. Remember to create at least one [[Help40:Banners:_Clients/en|Banner Client]] and one [[Help40:Banners:_Categories/en|Banner Category]] before creating any Banners.

==How to Access== 
To ''''add'''' a new Banner or ''''edit'''' an existing Banner, navigate to the [[Help40:Banners/en|Banner Manager]]:
* Select {{rarr|Components,Banners,New}} to create a new Banner.
* Select {{rarr|Components,Banners}} and click on a Banner name to ''''Edit'''' an existing Banner.

==Screenshot== 
A banner may be a clickable image or some custom code. The Image Type is shown in the screenshot below. The custom type has the image selection box replaced with a code text area.


[[Image:Help-4x-Components-Banners-Banners-Edit-screen-en.png|800px]]

==Form Fields== 
*'''Name.''' The name of the Banner. This is the name that will display in the ''Name'' column of the [[Help40:Banners/en|Banner Manager]].
{{Chunk4x:colheader|Alias/en}}

===Details Tab=== 
'''Left Panel'''
{{Chunk4x:Help screen column header Detail Tab Banner Edit/en}}
'''Right Panel'''
{{Chunk4x:colheader|Status/en}}
{{Chunk4x:colheader|Sticky/en}}
{{Chunk4x:colheader|Language/en}}
{{Chunk4x:colheader|Version Note/en}}

===Banner Details Tab=== 
:[[Image:Help-4x-Components-Banners-Banners-Edit-Banners-Details-Tab-en.png|800px]]
{{Chunk4x:Help screen column header Banners Details Tab/en}}

===Publishing Tab=== 
[[Image:Help-4x-Components-Banners-Banners-Edit-Publishing-Options-Tab-en.png|800px]]
{{Chunk4x:colheader|PublishStartBanner/en}}
{{Chunk4x:colheader|PublishFinishBanner/en}}
{{Chunk4x:colheader|Created Date/en}}
{{Chunk4x:colheader|Enter Created By/en}}
{{Chunk4x:colheader|Enter Created By Alias/en}}
{{Chunk4x:colheader|Modified Date/en}}
{{Chunk4x:colheader|Modified By/en}}
{{Chunk4x:colheader|Revision/en}}
{{Chunk4x:colheader|Metadata Keywords/en}}
{{Chunk4x:colheader|Use Own Prefix/en}}
{{Chunk4x:colheader|Meta Keyword Prefix/en}}

==Toolbar== 
At the top of the page you will see the toolbar shown in the [[#Screenshot|Screenshot]] above. The functions are:
{{Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Save/en|banner}}
{{Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_SaveAndClose/en|banner}}
{{Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_SaveAndNew/en|banner}}
{{Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_SaveAsCopy/en|banner}}
{{Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Cancel/en|banner}} Or
{{Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Close/en|banner}}
{{Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Versions/en|banner}}
{{Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Help/en|banner}}

==Quick Tips== 
* Banners are placed on specific pages by adding Modules of type 'Banners' using the [[Help40:Modules/en|Module Manager]].
* If you have a series of Banners that you would like to display on one or more pages in random order:
*# Create the Banners you wish to include, making sure they have the same Client and Category.
*# Create a Banner Module for this Client and Category, and in the Menu Assignment pick the Menu Selections for the module to display on.
*# In the Banner Module, set the 'Randomise' value to 'Sticky, Randomise'.
: With these settings, the different Banners for that Client and Category will display on the selected pages in random order.

==Related Information== 
'''More Component Banner Help:'''

{| class="wikitable"
|-
! Related Help Screens !! Description
|-
| [[Help40:Banners/en|Banners]] || Used to view a list of existing Banners, edit current and create new Banners. There must be at least one Banner Client and Banner Category before a Banner can be created.
|-
| [[Help40:Banners:_Options/en|Banners: Options]] || Global options (configuration) for Banner Clients.
|-
| [[Help40:Banners:_Categories/en|Banners: Categories]] || Used to view a list of existing Banner Categories, edit current and create new Banner Categories. Note that Banner Categories are separate from other Categories, such as for Articles, Contacts, News Feeds, and Web Links. There must be at least one Banner Client and Banner Category before a Banner can be created.
|-
| [[Help40:Banners:_New_or_Edit_Category/en|Banners: New or Edit Category]] || This is where you can add a new Banner Category or edit an existing one. Note that you need to create at least one Banner Category before you can create a Banner. Also, Banner Categories are separate from other types of Categories, such as those for Articles, Contacts, and News Feeds.
|-
| [[Help40:Banners:_Clients/en|Banners: Clients]] || The Banner Client Manager is where you can edit existing Banner Clients or create new ones. Note that you must have at least one Banner Client and one Banner Category defined before you can add your first Banner.
|-
| [[Help40:Banners:_New_or_Edit_Client/en|Banners: New or Edit Client]] || This is where you add a new Banner Client or edit an existing one. Note that you need to create at least one Banner Client before you can create a Banner.
|-
| [[Help40:Banners:_Tracks/en|Banners Tracks]] || Used to view a list of existing Banner Tracking information.
|}


'''To place Banners on Pages:'''

{| class="wikitable"
|-
! Related Help Screens !! Description
|-
| [[Help40:Site_Modules:_Banners/en|Modules Banners]] || The Banner Module displays the active Banners from the Component.
|}

</translate>
{{Cathelp|5.0,5.1|Banner Manager Help Screens|Components Help Screens}}

Help5.x:Banners: Clients

2024-04-07T21:25:03Z

Heelc29: add help J5.1

<noinclude><languages /></noinclude>
<translate>

==Description== 
The Banner Client Manager is where you can edit existing Banner Clients or create new ones. Note that you must have at least one Banner Client and one Banner Category defined before you can add your first Banner.

==How to Access== 
* Select '''Components → Banners → Clients''' from the drop-down menu of the '''''Joomla! Administrator Panel'''''. You can also select the 'Clients' menu link from the [[Help40:Banners:_Categories/en|Banner Categories Manager]], [[Help40:Banners:_Edit/en|Banner Manager]] or the [[Help40:Banners:_Tracks/en|Banner Tracks Manager]].

==Screenshot== 
[[Image:Help-4x-components-banner-manager-clients-en.png|800px]]

==Column Headers== 
Click on the column heading to sort the list by that column's value.
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Checkbox/en}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Status/en}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Client/en}}
*'''Contact.''' The Contact for this Client.
{{Chunk4x:Help screen column header Published/en}}
{{Chunk4x:Help screen column header Unpublished/en}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Archived/en}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Trashed/en}}
*'''Purchase Type.''' The banner purchase type of the client. This is used to indicate how the client purchased the display time for their banners - monthly, yearly, etc...
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Id/en}}

==List Filters== 
'''Search bar'''. Near the top of the page you will see the search bar shown in the [[#screenshot|Screenshot]] above.
*'''Search by Text'''. Enter part of the search term and click the Search icon. ''Hover'' to see a ''Tooltip'' indicating which fields will be searched.{{-}}To 'Search by ID' enter "id:x", where "x" is the ID number (for example, "id:19").
*'''Filter Options'''. Click to display the additional filters.
*'''Clear'''. Click to clear the Filter field and restore the list to its unfiltered state.
*'''Ordering'''. Shows the current list ordering field. 2 ways to change the order:
**Select from the dropdown list. Ordering may be in ascending or descending order.
**Click a column heading. The column heading toggles between ascending and descending order.
*'''Number to Display'''. Shows the number of items in a list. Select from the dropdown list to change the number displayed.{{-}}The default for a site is '20' but this may be changed in the [[Help4.x:Site_Global_Configuration/en#defaultlistlimit|Global Configuration]].

===Filter Options=== 
Near the top of the page you will see the filter bar shown in the Screenshot above. The functions are:
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Select Status/en}}
'''Filter by Purchase Type'''
:[[File:Help35-colheader-select-type-en.png]]
*'''Select Type.''' Select the Purchase Type from the drop-down list box of available Purchase Types.

===Pagination=== 
{{Chunk4x:Help_screen_filters_Pagination/en}}

==Toolbar== 
At the top of the page you will see the toolbar shown in the [[#Screenshot|Screenshot]] above. The functions are:
*'''New'''. Opens the editing screen to create a new client.
*'''Actions:''' Reveals a list of actions for selected Items. Check one or more Item checkboxes to activate the list.
<ul>
*'''Publish'''. Makes the selected client available to visitors to your website.
*'''Unpublish.''' Makes the selected client unavailable to visitors to your website.
*'''Archive'''. Changes the status of the selected client to indicate that they are archived. {{-}}Archived client can be moved back to the published or unpublished state by selecting 'Archived' in the 'Select Status' filter and changing the status of the client.
*'''Check-In'''. Checks-in the selected client. Works with one or multiple client selected.
*'''Trash'''. Changes the status of the selected client to indicate that they are trashed.{{-}}Trashed client can still be recovered by selecting 'Trashed' in the 'Select Status' filter and changing the status of the articles to Published or Unpublished as preferred.{{-}}To permanently delete trashed client, select 'Trashed' in the 'Select Status' filter, select the client to be permanently deleted, then click the 'Empty Trash' toolbar icon.
</ul>
*'''Help'''. Opens this help screen.
*'''Options.''' Opens the Options window where settings such as default parameters can be edited.

==Options== 
See [[:Help4.x:Banners:_Options/en|Banners: Options]].

==Related Information== 
* To create or edit Banners: [[Help40:Banners:_Edit/en|Banner - New/Edit]]
* To work with Banner Categories: [[Help40:Banners:_Categories/en|Banner Category Manager]]

</translate>
{{Cathelp|5.0,5.1|Banner Manager Help Screens|Components Help Screens}}

Help5.x:Banners: Categories

2024-04-07T21:24:53Z

Heelc29: add help J5.1

<noinclude><languages /></noinclude>
<translate>

==Description== 
Used to view a list of existing Banner Categories, edit current and create new Banner Categories. Note that Banner Categories are separate from other Categories, such as for Articles, Contacts, News Feeds, and Web Links. There must be at least one Banner Client and Banner Category '''before''' a Banner can be created.

==How to Access== 
* Select {{rarr|Components,Banners,Categories}}

==Screenshot== 
[[Image:Help-4x-Components-Banners-Categories-screen-en.png|800px]]

==Column Headers== 
Click on the column heading to sort the list by that column's value.


*'''Checkbox'''. Check this box to select one or more items. To select all items, check the box in the column heading. After one or more boxes are checked, click a toolbar button to take an action on the selected item or items. Many toolbar actions, such as Publish and Unpublish, can work with multiple items. Others, such as Edit, only work on one item at a time. If multiple items are checked and you press Edit, the first item will be opened for editing.
* '''Ordering.''' You can change the order of an item within a list as follows:
**If the list Filter Options include a Position filter select the desired Position. This will limit the list to items that are assigned to that Position.
**Select the Ordering icon [[Image:Help30-Ordering-colheader-icon.png]] in the Table heading to make it the active ordering item. The ordering icons in each row will change from light grey to dark grey and the pointer will change to a drag arrow on hover.
**Select one of the Ordering icons [[Image:Help30-Ordering-colheader-grab-bar-icon.png]] and drag it up or down to change the position of that row in the list. The items will display in the new order within the Position.
*'''Status'''. The published status of the item.
*'''Title'''. The name of the item. For a Menu Item, the Title will display in the Menu. For an Article or Category, the Title may optionally be displayed on the web page. This entry is required. You can open the item for editing by clicking on the Title.
*'''Hits'''. The number of times an item has been viewed.
*'''Access'''. The [[S:MyLanguage/Help4.x:Users:_Viewing_Access_Levels{{#translation:}}|viewing Access Level]] for this item.
*'''Language'''. Item language.
*'''ID'''. This is a unique identification number for this item assigned automatically by Joomla. It is used to identify the item internally, and you cannot change this number. When creating a new item, this field displays "0" until you save the new entry, at which point a new ID is assigned to it.

==List Filters== 
{{Chunk4x:Help_screen_filters_Search_Bar_Filter/en}}

===Filter Options=== 
{{Chunk4x:Help_screen_filters_Status/en}}
{{Chunk4x:Help_screen_filters_Access_Level/en}}
{{Chunk4x:Help_screen_filters_Language/en}}
{{Chunk4x:Help_screen_filters_Tags/en}}
{{Chunk4x:Help_screen_filters_Max_Levels/en}}

===Number of Items to Display=== 
{{Chunk4x:Help_screen_filters_Pagination/en}}

==Toolbar== 
At the top of the page you will see the toolbar shown in the [[#Screenshot|Screenshot]] above. The functions are:
*'''New'''. Opens the editing screen to create a new item.
*'''Actions:''' Reveals a list of actions for selected Items. Check one or more Item checkboxes to activate the list.
*'''Rebuild.''' Reconstructs and refreshes the relevant table. Normally, you do ''not'' need to rebuild this table. This function is provided in case the data in the table becomes corrupted.
*'''Options.''' Opens the Options window where settings such as default parameters can be edited.
*'''Help'''. Opens this help screen.

==Batch Process== 
The Batch Process allows a change in settings for a group of selected items marked with a check-mark in the corresponding check-mark boxes. To use: click on the link found below the table of items being viewed to activate the drop down field area. Using the 'Batch' Toolbar button will open a pop up window as shown below.


[[Image:Help-4x-colheader-batch-process-categories-en.png]]


You can change one value or all three values at one time.
:'''''Note''' - if you copy items to a new category, changes you have selected from access level and language will be applied to the copies, not the original.''
'''How to Batch Process''' a group of items:
* Select one or more items on the list by checking the desired category check boxes.
* Click the 'Batch' Toolbar button.
* Set one or more of the following values:
** To change the '''Access Levels''', select the desired new access level from the Set Access Level list box.
** To change the '''Language''', select the desired language from the Set Language list box.
** To change the '''Category''', select a category. To leave the category unchanged, use the default value of "Select".
*** To copy the items to a different category, select the desired category from the category list box and check the Copy option. In this case, the original items are unchanged and the copies are assigned to the new category and, if selected, the new access level and language.
*** To move the items to a different category, select the desired category from the category list box and check the Move option. In this case, the original items will be moved to a new category and, if selected, be assigned the new access level and language.
* When all of the settings are entered, click on Process to perform the changes. A message '''"Batch process completed successfully."''' will show.
Note that nothing will happen if you (a) don't have any items selected or (b) have not selected an access level, language, or category.
If you wish to clear your entered selections, click on the Cancel button. This will return all of the Batch controls to their default values. Note that this does ''not'' uncheck the check boxes for the items.

==Quick Tips== 
* You must add at least one Banner Client and Banner Category ''before'' you can add a Banner.

==Related Information== 
* To create or edit Banners: [[Help40:Banners:_Edit/en|Banner - New/Edit]]
* To work with Banner Clients: [[Help40:Banners:_Clients/en|Banner Client Manager]]

</translate>
{{Cathelp|5.0,5.1|Banner Manager Help Screens|Components Help Screens}}

Help5.x:Banners

2024-04-07T21:24:44Z

Heelc29: add help J5.1

<noinclude><languages /></noinclude>
<translate>

==Description== 
Banners are blocks of content containing advertising information. Each banner has a Client, the person paying for the information, and a Track record, the number of times the banner has been selected. A site may have several banners in different locations.
The Banners screen shows a list of existing Banners with links to edit current and create new Banners. There must be at least one Banner Client and one Banner Category '''before''' a Banner can be created.

==How to Access== 
* Select {{rarr|Components,Banners,Banners}} from the Administrator menu.
* Or Select a numbered button in the [[Help40:Banners:_Categories/en|Banner Categories Manager]] or the [[Help40:Banners:_Clients/en|Banner Clients Manager]] pages.

==Screenshot== 
[[Image:Help-4x-components-banner-manager-banners-en.png|800px]]

==Column Headers== 
In the table containing Banners the different columns are listed below. Click on the column heading on the banner manager screen to sort the list by that column's value.
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Checkbox/en}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Ordering/en}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Status/en}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Banner Name/en}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Sticky/en}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Client/en}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Impressions/en}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Clicks/en}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Language/en}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Id/en}}

==List Filters== 
'''Search bar'''. Near the top of the page you will see the search bar shown in the [[#screenshot|Screenshot]] above.
*'''Search by Text'''. Enter part of the search term and click the Search icon. ''Hover'' to see a ''Tooltip'' indicating which fields will be searched.{{-}}To 'Search by ID' enter "id:x", where "x" is the ID number (for example, "id:19").
*'''Filter Options'''. Click to display the additional filters.
*'''Clear'''. Click to clear the Filter field and restore the list to its unfiltered state.
*'''Ordering'''. Shows the current list ordering field. 2 ways to change the order:
**Select from the dropdown list. Ordering may be in ascending or descending order.
**Click a column heading. The column heading toggles between ascending and descending order.
*'''Number to Display'''. Shows the number of items in a list. Select from the dropdown list to change the number displayed.{{-}}The default for a site is '20' but this may be changed in the [[Help4.x:Site_Global_Configuration/en#defaultlistlimit|Global Configuration]].
'''Filter Options'''


Near the top of the page you will see the filter bar shown in the Screenshot above. The functions are:


{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Select Status/en}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Select Category/en}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Select Client/en}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Select Language/en}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Select Max Levels/en}}
{{Chunk4x:Help_screen_filters_Pagination/en}}

==Toolbar== 
At the top of the page you will see the toolbar shown in the [[#Screenshot|Screenshot]] above. The functions are:
*'''New'''. Opens the editing screen to create a new banner.
*'''Actions:''' Reveals a list of actions for selected Items. Check one or more Item checkboxes to activate the list.
<ul>
*'''Publish'''. Makes the selected banner available to visitors to your website.
*'''Unpublish.''' Makes the selected banner unavailable to visitors to your website.
*'''Archive'''. Changes the status of the selected banner to indicate that they are archived. {{-}}Archived banner can be moved back to the published or unpublished state by selecting 'Archived' in the 'Select Status' filter and changing the status of the banner.
*'''Check-In'''. Checks-in the selected banner. Works with one or multiple banner selected.
*'''Trash'''. Changes the status of the selected banner to indicate that they are trashed.{{-}}Trashed banner can still be recovered by selecting 'Trashed' in the 'Select Status' filter and changing the status of the articles to Published or Unpublished as preferred.{{-}}To permanently delete trashed banner, select 'Trashed' in the 'Select Status' filter, select the banner to be permanently deleted, then click the 'Empty Trash' toolbar icon.
*'''Batch'''. Batch processes the selected banner. Works with one or multiple items selected.
</ul>
*'''Options.''' Opens the Options window where settings such as default parameters can be edited.
*'''Help'''. Opens this help screen.
See [[Help40:Banners:_Options/en|Banner Manager Options]] for more information.

==Quick Tips== 
* You must add at least one [[Help40:Banners:_Clients/en|Banner Client]] and [[Help40:Banners:_Categories/en|Banner Category]] ''before'' you can [[Help40:Banners:_Edit/en|add a Banner]].

==Related Information== 



{| class="wikitable"
|-
! Related Help Screens !! Description
|-
| [[Help40:Banners:_Edit/en|Banners: Edit]] || Used to add or edit banners which can be displayed on your Joomla! website. Remember to create at least one [[Help40:Components_Banners_Clients/en|Banner Client]] and one[[Help40:Components_Banners_Categories/en|Banner Category]] before creating any Banners.
|-
| [[Help40:Banners:_Options/en|Banners: Options]] || Global options (configuration) for Banner Clients.
|-
| [[Help40:Banners:_Categories/en|Banners: Categories]] || Used to view a list of existing Banner Categories, edit current and create new Banner Categories. Note that Banner Categories are separate from other Categories, such as for Articles, Contacts, News Feeds, and Web Links. There must be at least one Banner Client and Banner Category before a Banner can be created.
|-
| [[Help40:Banners:_New_or_Edit_Category/en|Banners: New or Edit Category]] || This is where you can add a new Banner Category or edit an existing one. Note that you need to create at least one Banner Category before you can create a Banner. Also, Banner Categories are separate from other types of Categories, such as those for Articles, Contacts, and News Feeds.
|-
| [[Help40:Banners:_Clients/en|Banners: Clients]] || The Banner Client Manager is where you can edit existing Banner Clients or create new ones. Note that you must have at least one Banner Client and one Banner Category defined before you can add your first Banner.
|-
| [[Help40:Banners:_New_or_Edit_Client/en|Banners: New or Edit Client]] || This is where you add a new Banner Client or edit an existing one. Note that you need to create at least one Banner Client before you can create a Banner.
|-
| [[Help40:Banners:_Tracks/en|Banners: Tracks]] || Used to view a list of existing Banner Tracking information.
|}

</translate>
{{Cathelp|5.0,5.1|Banner Manager Help Screens|Components Help Screens}}

Help5.x:Articles: Featured

2024-04-07T21:19:30Z

Heelc29: add help J5.1

<noinclude><languages /></noinclude>
<translate>

==Description== 
Used to control which 'Featured Articles' are displayed on the Front Page and in what order they are displayed. The Front Page is often the Home page of a web site, but it can be any page in the site.

==How to Access== 
{{rarr|Content,Featured Articles}}


To add a Article:
*click the '''New''' toolbar button
To edit a Article:
*select a '''Title''' from the list
{{anchor|screenshot}}

==Screenshot== 
[[File:Help-4x-Content-Featured-Articles-screen-en.png|800px|none]]

==Column Headers== 
*'''Checkbox'''. Check this box to select articles. To select all articles, check the box in the column heading. After boxes are checked the toolbar button 'Actions' get active.
*{{anchor|ordering}}'''Ordering'''. You can change the order of an article within a list as follows:
**Select the Ordering icon [[File:Help-4x-Ordering-colheader-icon.png|9px||Ordering icon]] in the List heading to make it active.
**Select one of the Three dots icons [[File:Help-4x-Ordering-colheader-grab-bar-icon.png|5px|||Three dots icon]] and drag it up or down to change the position of that row in the list.
**In the Filter Options you may limit the list to articles that are assigned for example to a Language.
*'''Featured'''. Click the icon to unfeature.
*'''Status'''. Status of article. Hover icon for informations.
*'''Title'''. The title of the article. Edit the article by clicking on the Title.
*'''Access'''. The viewing [[Help4.x:Users:_Viewing_Access_Levels/en|Access Level]] for this article.
*'''Author'''. Name of the User who created this article.
*'''Associations'''. Shows the associated articles. Click on the Language Code to open the article. [[Help4.x:Multilingual_Associations/en|Multilingual only.]]
*'''Language'''. Articles language, default is 'All'.
*'''Date Created'''. The date this article was created.
*'''Hits'''. The number of times an article has been viewed.
*'''ID'''. A unique identification number for this article, you cannot change this number. When creating a new article, this field displays '0' until you save the new entry.

==List Filters== 
'''Search bar'''. Near the top of the page you will see the search bar shown in the [[#screenshot|Screenshot]] above.
*'''Search by Text'''. Enter part of the search term and click the Search icon. ''Hover'' to see a ''Tooltip'' indicating which fields will be searched.{{-}}To 'Search by ID' enter "id:x", where "x" is the ID number (for example, "id:19").
*'''Filter Options'''. Click to display the additional filters.
*'''Clear'''. Click to clear the Filter field and restore the list to its unfiltered state.
*'''Ordering'''. Shows the current list ordering field. 2 ways to change the order:
**Select from the dropdown list. Ordering may be in ascending or descending order.
**Click a column heading. The column heading toggles between ascending and descending order.
*'''Number to Display'''. Shows the number of articles in a list. Select from the dropdown list to change the number displayed.{{-}}The default for a site is '20' but this may be changed in the [[Help4.x:Site_Global_Configuration/en#defaultlistlimit|Global Configuration]].

===Filter Options=== 
Near the top of the page you will see the filter bar shown in the [[#screenshot|Screenshot]] above.
*'''Select Status'''. Select from Trashed / Unpublished / Published / Archived / All.
*'''Select Category'''. Select from the list of available categories.
*'''Select Access'''. Select from the list of available viewing access levels.
*'''Select Author'''. Select from the list of available authors.
*'''Select Language'''. Select from the list of available languages.
*'''Select Tag'''. Select from the list of available tags.
*'''Select Max Levels'''. Select from the list of available levels.

===Pagination=== 
'''Page Controls'''. When the number of articles is more than one page, you will see a page control bar near the bottom of the page shown in the [[#screenshot|Screenshot]] above. The current page number being viewed has a dark colour background.
*'''Start'''. Click to go to the first page.
*'''Prev'''. Click to go to the previous page.
*'''Page numbers'''. Click to go to the desired page.
*'''Next'''. Click to go to the next page.
*'''End'''. Click to go to the last page.

==Toolbar== 
At the top of the page you will see the toolbar shown in the [[#screenshot|Screenshot]] above.
*'''New'''. Opens the editing screen to create a new article.
*'''Actions'''. Reveals a list of actions for selected articles. Check one or more articles checkboxes to activate the list.
**'''Publish'''. Makes the selected articles available to visitors to your website.
**'''Unpublish'''. Makes the selected articles unavailable to visitors to your website.
**'''Unfeature'''. Changes the status of featured articles to unfeatured.
**'''Archive'''. Changes the status of the selected articles to indicate that they are archived. [[J4.x:How_to_Archive_an_Article/en|Learn more.]]
**'''Check-In'''. Checks-in the selected articles.
**'''Trash'''. Changes the status of the selected articles to indicate that they are trashed. [[J4.x:Deleting_an_Article/en|Learn more.]]
*'''Options'''. Opens [[Help4.x:Articles:_Options/en|Articles: Options]].
*'''Help'''. Opens this help screen.

==Quick Tips== 
*If Joomla is installed without sample data, one article category called 'Uncategorised' is created automatically.
*To see trashed and archived articles, set the Status filter to 'All'.
*To change the ordering of articles within a category, click on the Ordering column heading to sort by this column. Also, it is easier to see the ordering if you filter on the desired category.

==Related Information== 
{{:Chunk4x:Help_screen_related_Articles/en}}

</translate>
{{Cathelp|5.0,5.1|Frontpage Manager Help Screens|Content Help Screens}}

Help5.x:Articles: Edit Category

2024-04-07T21:18:49Z

Heelc29: add help J5.1

<noinclude><languages /></noinclude>
<translate>

==Description== 
{{Chunk4x:Help Screen Description Categories/en}}


The edit form is used to create a new Category or to alter the properties of an existing Category.

==How to Access== 
To add a new category, starting from the Administrator menu:
* Select {{rarr|Home Dashboard,Site panel,Categories + button}}. Or...
*Select {{rarr|Content,Categories + button}}. Or...
*Select {{rarr|Content,Categories}}. Then...
**Select the '''New''' button in the Toolbar to create a new Category. Or...
To edit an existing Category:
*Select {{rarr|Content,Categories}}. Then...
**Select a '''Category title''' From the list of categories.

==Screenshot== 
:[[File:Help-4x-Components-Content-Categories-Edit-screen-en.png|800px]]

==Form Fields== 
*'''Title.''' The Title for this item. This may or may not display on the page, depending on the parameter values you choose.
*'''Alias'''. The internal name of the item. Normally, you can leave this blank and Joomla will fill in a default value Title in lower case and with dashes instead of spaces. [[S:MyLanguage/Alias{{#translation:}}|Learn more.]]
{{anchor|content}}

===Category Tab=== 
'''Left Panel'''
{{Chunk4x:Help_screen_column_header_Description/en}}
<ul>
<li>
{{Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Toggle_Editor/en}}
</li>
</ul>
'''Right Panel'''
*'''Parent.''' The item (category, menu item, and so on) that is the parent of the item being edited.
*'''Status.''' (Published/Unpublished/Archived/Trashed) The published status of the item.
*'''Access Level.''' Who has access to this item. Default options are:
**'''Public:''' Everyone has access
**'''Guest:''' Everyone has access
**'''Registered:''' Only registered users have access
**'''Special:''' Only users with author status or higher have access
**'''Super Users:''' Only super users have access
**Enter the desired level using the drop-down list box. Custom Access Control Levels created will show if they exist.
*'''Language.''' Item language.
*'''Tags.''' Enter one or more optional tags for this item. You can select existing tags by entering in the first few letters. You may also create new tags by entering them here. Tags allow you to see lists of related items across content types (for example, articles, contacts, and categories).
*'''Note.''' Item note. This is normally for the site administrator's use (for example, to document information about this item) and does not show in the front end of the site.
*'''Version Note.''' Optional field to identify this version of the item in the item's [[Help40:Components_Version_History/en|Version History]] window.{{anchor|choosealayout}}{{anchor|options}}

===Options=== 
This shows Options for this Category, as shown below when tab is clicked:
:[[File:Help-4x-Categories-Edit-screen-options-tab-en.png|600px|none]]
*'''Layout'''. Use a different layout from the supplied components view or overrides in the templates.
*'''Image'''. Choose an image to be displayed with this item/category in the Frontend.
*'''Alt Text'''. Alternative text used for visitors without access to images.

===Workflow=== 
[[Image:Help-4x-Categories-Edit-screen-workflow-tab-en.png|600px]]
*'''Workflow.''' Select from the drop-down list.{{anchor|publishing}}

===Publishing=== 
The grayed out fields are for information only and may not be edited.
*'''Created Date.''' Date the item(Article, Category, Weblink, etc.) was created.
*'''Created by.''' Optional, choose from a popup window of users. Select User by clicking on the user's name. Defaults to user creating new category if left blank.
*'''Modified Date.''' ''(Informative only)'' Date of last modification.
*'''Modified By.''' ''(Informative only)'' Username who performed the last modification.
*'''Hits.''' Number of hits on a Category view.
*'''ID.''' The unique ID number automatically assigned to this item by Joomla!. This number cannot be changed.
*'''Meta Description.''' An optional paragraph to be used as the description of the page in the HTML output. This will generally display in the results of search engines. If entered, this creates an HTML meta element with a name attribute of "description" and a content attribute equal to the entered text.
*'''Meta Keywords.''' Optional entry for keywords. Must be entered separated by commas (for example, "cats, dogs, pets") and may be entered in upper or lower case. (For example, "CATS" will match "cats" or "Cats"). Keywords can be used in several ways:
**To help Search Engines and other systems classify the content of the Article.
**In combination with Banner tags, to display specific Banners based on the Article content. For example, say you have one Banner with an ad for dog products and another Banner for cat products. You can have your dog Banner display when a User is viewing a dog-related Article and your cat Banner display for a cat-related Article. To do this, you would:
***Add the keywords 'dog' and 'cat' to the appropriate Articles.
***Add the Tags 'dog' and 'cat' to the appropriate Banners in the [[Help40:Banners:_Edit/en|Banner Manager New/Edit]] screen.
***Set the Banner module Parameter 'Search By Tags' to 'Yes in the [[Help40:Site_Modules:_Banners/en|Banner Module Edit]] screen.
**For articles only, in combination with the [[Help40:Site_Modules:_Articles_-_Related/en|Related Articles]] module, to display Articles that share at least one keyword in common. For example, if the current Article displayed has the keywords "cats, dogs, monkeys", any other Articles with at least one of these keywords will show in the Related Articles module.
*'''Author.''' Optional entry for an Author name within the metadata. If entered, this creates an HTML meta element with the name attribute of "author" and the content attribute as entered here.
*'''Robots.''' The instructions for web "robots" that browse to this page.
**''Use Global'': Use the value set in the Component→Options for this component.
**''Index, Follow'': Index this page and follow the links on this page.
**''No index, Follow'': Do not index this page, but still follow the links on the page. For example, you might do this for a site map page where you want the links to be indexed but you don't want this page to show in search engines.
**''Index, No follow'': Index this page, but do not follow any links on the page. For example, you might want to do this for an events calendar, where you want the page to show in search engines but you do not want to index each event.
**''No index, no follow'': Do not index this page or follow any links on the page.{{anchor|associations}}

===Associations=== 
This shows Associations for this Category, as shown below when tab is clicked:


[[File:Help-4x-Categories-Edit-screen-associations-tab-en.png|600px]]


*'''Select a Category:''' Select or Create a Category to associate.{{anchor|permissions}}

===Permissions Tab=== 
This section shows permissions for this category. The screen shows as follows.


[[File:Help-4x-Categories-Edit-screen-permissions-tab-en.png|600px]]


{{Chunk4x:Change_Permissions/en}}

==Toolbar== 
At the top of the page you will see the toolbar shown in the [[#Screenshot|Screenshot]] above. The functions are:
*'''Save'''. Saves the item and stays in the current screen.
*'''Save & Close'''. Saves the item and closes the current screen.
*'''Save & New'''. Saves the item and keeps the editing screen open and ready to create another item.
*'''Save as Copy'''. Saves your changes to a copy of the current item. Does not affect the current item. This toolbar icon is not shown if you are creating a new item.
*'''Cancel'''. Closes the current screen and returns to the previous screen without saving any modifications you may have made. Or
*'''Close'''. Closes the current screen and returns to the previous screen without saving any modifications you may have made. This toolbar icon is not shown if you are creating a new item.
*'''Versions'''. Opens the Item Version History window to show any prior versions of this item. This allows you to view older versions of this item and, if desired, restore from an older version. See [[S:MyLanguage/Help40:Components_Version_History{{#translation:}}|Version History]] for more information.
*'''Help'''. Opens this help screen.

==Related Information== 
*[[Help40:Editors/en|TinyMCE and Code Mirror Editors]]
*To work with existing Categories: [[Help40:Articles:_Categories/en|Category Manager]]
*To work with Articles: [[Help40:Articles/en|Article Manager]]

</translate>
{{Cathelp|5.0,5.1|Category Management Help Screens|Content Help Screens}}

Help4.x:Site Global Configuration

2024-04-07T21:16:14Z

Heelc29: J5 has own help docs

<noinclude><languages /></noinclude>
<translate>
==Description== 


The Global Configuration screen allows you to configure the Joomla site with your personal settings. Settings made in this screen apply to the whole site.

==How to access== 
</translate>
*<translate> {{<tvar name=1>rarr</tvar>|System,Setup Panel,Global Configuration}}</translate>
{{anchor|screenshot}}
<translate>

==Screenshot== 
</translate>
:[[File:Help-4x-global-configuration-screen-<translate> en</translate>.png|none|750px]]
<translate>

==Form Fields== 

===Site=== 


[[<tvar name=1>Help4.x:Site_Global_Configuration_Site</tvar>/en|Complete screenshot.]]

====Site==== 
</translate>
{{anchor|site}}
*<translate> '''Site Name'''. Enter the name of the website. This will be used in various locations (for example the Backend browser title bar and Site Offline pages).</translate>
*<translate> '''Site Offline'''. Select whether access to the Frontend is available.</translate> <translate> [[<tvar name=1>J3.x:Taking_the_website_temporarily_offline</tvar>/en|Learn more.]]</translate>
**<translate> '''Offline Message'''.</translate>
***<translate> Use Custom Message:</translate> <translate> The message uses the value defined in the 'Custom Message' field.</translate>
***<translate> Use Site Language Default Message:</translate> <translate> The message uses the value defined in the site language ini file.</translate>
**<translate> '''Offline Image'''. Select an image to be displayed on the offline page. Make sure the image is less than 400px wide.</translate>{{anchor|frontendediting}}
*<translate> '''Frontend Editing'''. Select editing for modules and menu items.</translate>
*<translate> '''Default Editor'''. Select the default text editor. Registered Users will be able to change their preference in their personal details.</translate> {{anchor|captcha}}
*<translate> '''Default Captcha'''. Select the default captcha for your site. You may need to enter required information in the [[<tvar name=1>Chunk4x:Extensions_Plugin_Manager_Edit_CAPTCHA_Group</tvar>/en|captcha plugin]].</translate>
*<translate> '''Default Access Level'''. Select the default access level for new items.</translate> {{anchor|defaultlistlimit}}
*<translate> '''Default List Limit'''. Sets the default length of lists in the Backend for all users. </translate>
*<translate> '''Default Feed Limit'''. Select the number of content items to show in the feeds.</translate>
*<translate> '''Feed Email Address'''. The RSS and Atom newsfeeds include the author's email address.</translate>
**<translate> Author Email:</translate> <translate> Use each author's email from [[<tvar name=1>Help4.x:Users</tvar>/en|Users]] in the news feed.</translate>
**<translate> Site Email:</translate> <translate> Include the site [[<tvar name=1>#fromemail</tvar>|From Email]] address for each article.</translate>
<translate>

====Metadata==== 
</translate>
{{anchor|robots}}
*<translate> '''Site Meta Description'''. Enter a description of the overall website that is to be used by search engines.</translate>
*<translate> '''Robots'''. Robots instructions.</translate>
**index, follow: <translate> Index this page and follow the links on this page.</translate>
**noindex, follow: <translate> Do not index this page, but still follow the links on the page. For example, you might do this for a site map page where you want the links to be indexed but you don't want this page to show in search engines.</translate>
** index, nofollow: <translate> Index this page, but do not follow any links on the page. For example, you might want to do this for an events calendar, where you want the page to show in search engines but you do not want to index each event.</translate>
** noindex, nofollow: <translate> Do not index this page or follow any links on the page.</translate>
*<translate> '''Content Rights'''.</translate> <translate> Describe what rights others have to use this content. This is conveyed to search engines using the <tvar name=1>'rights'</tvar> meta tag in the HTML head.</translate>
*<translate> '''Author Meta Tag'''. Show the author meta tag when viewing articles.</translate>
*<translate> '''Joomla Version'''.</translate> <translate> Controls whether the <tvar name=1>'generator'</tvar> meta tag in the HTML document's header in the Frontend and in Atom feeds includes the exact version of the Joomla site. It is recommended to hide it for security reasons.</translate>
<translate>

====SEO==== 
</translate>
*<translate> '''Search Engine Friendly URLs'''. Select if the URLs are optimised for Search Engines.</translate>
*<translate> '''Use URL Rewriting'''.</translate>
**<translate> Apache and Litespeed: Rename <tvar name=1>'htaccess.txt'</tvar> to <tvar name=2>'.htaccess'</tvar></translate> <translate> [<tvar name=1>https://httpd.apache.org/docs/2.4/howto/htaccess.html</tvar> Learn more.]</translate>
**<translate> IIS: Rename <tvar name=1>'web.config.txt'</tvar> to <tvar name=2>'web.config'</tvar></translate>
**<translate> NginX: you must [[<tvar name=1>Nginx</tvar>/en|configure your server]]</translate>
**<translate> Other servers or if unsure: please consult your hosting company</translate>
*<translate> '''Add Suffix to URL'''. If yes, the system will add a suffix to the URL based on the document type.</translate>
*<translate> '''Unicode Aliases'''. Choose between transliteration and unicode aliases. Transliteration is the default.</translate>
*<translate> '''Site Name in Page Titles'''. Begin or end all Page Titles with the site name (for example, "My Site Name - My Article Name").</translate>
<translate>

====Cookie==== 
</translate>
*<translate> '''Cookie Domain'''. Domain to use when setting session cookies. Precede domain with <tvar name=1>'.'</tvar> if cookie should be valid for all subdomains.</translate>
*<translate> '''Cookie Path'''. Path the cookie should be valid for.</translate>
{{anchor|system}}
<translate>

===System=== 


[[<tvar name=1>Help4.x:Site_Global_Configuration_System</tvar>/en|Complete screenshot.]]

====Debug==== 
</translate>
*<translate> '''Debug System'''. If enabled, diagnostic information, language translation, and SQL errors (if present) will be displayed. The information will be displayed at the foot of every page you view within the Joomla Backend and Frontend. It is not advisable to leave the debug mode activated when running a live website.</translate>
*<translate> '''Debug Language'''. Select if the debugging indicators <tvar name=1>**...**</tvar> or <tvar name=2>??...??</tvar> for the Joomla Language files will be displayed. Debug Language will work without Debug System being activated, but you will not get the additional detailed references that will help you correct any errors.</translate>
**<translate> '''Language Display'''.</translate> <translate> Select if you should display the language constant or the language value when debugging the language strings.</translate>
<translate>

====Cache==== 
</translate>
*<translate> '''System Cache'''. Enable caching and set caching level.</translate> <translate> [[<tvar name=1>Cache</tvar>/en|Learn more.]]</translate>
**<translate> Conservative level: smaller system cache.</translate>
**<translate> Progressive level: faster, bigger system cache, includes module renderers cache. Not appropriate for extremely large sites.</translate>
**<translate> '''Cache Handler'''.</translate>
***<translate> File: Native caching mechanism is file-based. Please make sure the cache folders are writable.</translate>
**<translate> '''Platform Specific Caching'''. Enable when HTML output on mobile differs from other devices.</translate>
**<translate> '''Cache Time (minutes)'''. The maximum length of time in minutes for a cache file to be stored before it is refreshed.</translate>
**<translate> '''Path to Cache Folder'''. Specify a writable folder to store cache files if you do not wish to use the default folder.</translate>
<translate>

====Session==== 
</translate>
*<translate> '''Session Handler'''. The mechanism by which Joomla identifies a User once they are connected to the website using non-persistent cookies. </translate>
**<translate> Database: The database session handler is the default handler because it is the only one that Joomla can fully configure and control on its own.</translate>
**<translate> Filesystem: The filesystem handler will be slightly more performant than the database handler, but it requires PHP to be configured properly otherwise it will crash and Joomla will be totally unusable.</translate>
***<translate> '''Session Save Path'''.</translate> <translate> Enter a full filesystem path. Ensure the path has appropriate permissions for PHP to read and write files, and if <tvar name=1>'session garbage collection'</tvar> is enabled to delete files from it.</translate>{{-}}<translate> If this path is not set, Joomla will rely on the PHP <tvar name=1>session.save_path</tvar> INI configuration or fallback to the system temporary directory (as defined by the <tvar name=2>sys_get_temp_dir()</tvar> PHP function).</translate>{{-}}<translate> If neither of those paths are configured or the permissions are wrong then it's game over. To recover, edit the <tvar name=1>configuration.php</tvar> file and set <tvar name=2>$session_handler = 'database'</tvar>.</translate>
**<translate> Other handlers (APCu, Memcached, Redis, and WinCache) all rely on optional PHP extensions and may be available if your system supports them. APCu or WinCache may be no better than the "plain" filesystem option. The Memcached and Redis handlers are overkill for Joomla in a typical shared hosting environment. Those types of handlers succeed if you are deploying Joomla in a load balanced environment where multiple servers are involved and you need the session data for the application to be available across all servers.</translate>
*<translate> '''Session Lifetime (minutes)'''. Auto log out a User after they have been inactive for the entered number of minutes. Do not set too high.</translate>{{anchor|sharedsessions}}
*<translate> '''Shared Sessions'''. When enabled, a user's session is shared between the Frontend and Backend sections of the site. Note that changing this value will invalidate all existing sessions on the site.</translate>{{-}}<translate> This is not available when the [[<tvar name=1>#forcehttps</tvar>|Force HTTPS]] option is set to 'Administrator Only'.</translate>
*<translate> '''Track Session Metadata'''.</translate>
**<translate> Yes: Additional metadata about a user's session (including their username, user ID, and which application they are logged into) will be logged to the session database table.</translate>
**<translate> No: Features dependent on this data will be unavailable.</translate>
{{anchor|server}}
<translate>

===Server=== 


[[<tvar name=1>Help4.x:Site_Global_Configuration_Server</tvar>/en|Complete screenshot.]]

====Server==== 
</translate>
*<translate> '''Path to Temp Folder'''. Please specify a writable folder to store temporary files.</translate>
*<translate> '''Gzip Page Compression'''.</translate>
**<translate> Yes: Automatically compress the generated <tvar name=1>HTML</tvar> pages with <tvar name=2>Gzip</tvar>, making them smaller and increasing your site's speed score.</translate>
**<translate> No: If your server is already doing that for you or if it conflicts with third party extensions.</translate>
*<translate> '''Error Reporting'''. This parameter sets the level of error reporting to be used by <tvar name=1>PHP</tvar> on the Joomla site.</translate>
**<translate> System Default:</translate> <translate> Leaves the level of error reporting to that set up in the server.</translate>
**<translate> None:</translate> <translate> Switches off error reporting.</translate>
**<translate> Simple:</translate> <translate> Override the server setting to give a basic level of reporting.</translate>
**<translate> Maximum:</translate> <translate> Override the server setting to reporting of all errors.</translate>{{-}}<translate> Should your Joomla site fail to the extent that it is not possible to use the administrator page to activate error reporting, you can switch on full error reporting by editing the <tvar name=1>'configuration.php'</tvar> file. Changing the <tvar name=2>'$error_reporting'</tvar> parameter in that file to a value of 'maximum' is the equivalent to setting Error Reporting to 'Maximum'.</translate>{{anchor|forcehttps}}
*<translate> '''Force <tvar name=1>HTTPS</tvar>'''. Force site access in the selected areas to occur only with <tvar name=1>HTTPS</tvar> (encrypted <tvar name=2>HTTP</tvar> connections with the <tvar name=3>https://</tvar> protocol prefix) and also force the use of secure cookies. Note, you must have <tvar name=1>HTTPS</tvar> enabled on your server to utilise this option.</translate>
<translate>

====Location==== 
</translate>
*<translate> '''Website Time Zone'''. Choose a city in the list to configure the date and time for display.</translate>
<translate>

====Web Services==== 
</translate>
*<translate> '''Enable CORS'''.</translate> <translate> Cross-Origin Resource Sharing <tvar name=1>([https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/HTTP/CORS CORS])</tvar> enables scripts running in a browser to interact with resources from a different origin.</translate>
**'''Access-Control-Allow-Origin'''. <translate> Specifies the origin allowed to access Web services on this site, sent back in response to a preflight request. Default: * (=all).</translate>
**'''Access-Control-Allow-Headers'''. <translate> Specifies the header(s) sent back in response to a preflight request. Default: <tvar name=1>Content-Type,X-Joomla-Token</tvar>.</translate>
**'''Access-Control-Allow-Methods'''. <translate> Specifies the Web service method(s) allowed to access on this site, sent back in response to a preflight request. Default: all methods available for the requested route.</translate>
<translate>

====Proxy==== 
</translate>
*<translate> '''Behind Load Balancer'''.</translate> <translate> If your site is behind a load balancer or reverse proxy, enable this setting so that IP addresses and other configurations within Joomla automatically take this into account.</translate>
*<translate> '''Enable Outbound Proxy'''.</translate> <translate> Some hosts do not allow any network access from your site to the outside world by default and require you to manually configure an outbound proxy.</translate>
**<translate> '''Outbound Proxy Host'''.</translate> <translate> Host (domain) name or IP address.</translate>
**<translate> '''Outbound Proxy Port'''.</translate>
**<translate> '''Outbound Proxy Username'''.</translate> <translate> Leave blank if your outbound proxy does not require authentication.</translate>
**<translate> '''Outbound Proxy Password'''.</translate>
<translate>

====Database==== 
</translate>
*<translate> '''Database Type'''. The type of database in use, selected during the installation process.</translate>{{-}}<translate> Do not edit this field unless absolutely necessary (for example the transfer of the database to a new hosting provider).</translate>
*<translate> '''Host'''. The hostname for your database entered during the installation process.</translate>{{-}}<translate> Do not edit this field unless absolutely necessary (for example the transfer of the database to a new hosting provider).</translate>
*<translate> '''Database Username'''. The username for access to your database entered during the installation process.</translate>{{-}}<translate> Do not edit this field unless absolutely necessary (for example the transfer of the database to a new hosting provider).</translate>
*<translate> '''Database Password'''. The password to be used to access the database.</translate>{{-}}<translate> Do not edit this field unless absolutely necessary (for example the transfer of the database to a new hosting provider).</translate>
*<translate> '''Database Name'''. The name for your database entered during the installation process.</translate>{{-}}<translate> Do not edit this field unless absolutely necessary (for example the transfer of the database to a new hosting provider).</translate>
*<translate> '''Database Tables Prefix'''. The prefix used for your database tables, created during the installation process.</translate>{{-}}<translate> Do not edit this field unless absolutely necessary (for example the transfer of the database to a new hosting provider).</translate>
*<translate> '''Connection Encryption'''.</translate>
**<translate> Default (server controlled)</translate>
**<translate> One-way authentication</translate>
***<translate> '''Verify Server Certificate'''.</translate>
****<translate> '''Path to CA File'''. File system path.</translate>
**<translate> Two-way authentication</translate>
***<translate> '''Path to Private Key File'''. File system location.</translate>
***<translate> '''Path to Certificate File'''. File system location.</translate>
***<translate> '''Verify Server Certificate'''.</translate>
****<translate> '''Path to CA File'''. File system path.</translate>
***<translate> '''Supported Cipher Suite (optional)'''. No entry required (only recommended for experienced users) – for more details, see the documentation of your database.</translate>
<translate>

====Mail==== 
</translate>
*<translate> '''Send Mail'''.</translate>
**<translate> Yes: Turn on mail sending.</translate>
**<translate> No: Turn off mail sending. It is recommended to put the site offline when disabling the mail function.</translate>
*<translate> '''Disable Mass Mail'''.</translate>
**<translate> Yes: Disable the Mass Mail Users function.</translate>
**<translate> No: Make the Mass Mail Users function active.</translate>{{anchor|fromemail}}
*<translate> '''From Email'''. The email address that will be used to send site email.</translate>
*<translate> '''From Name'''. Text displayed in the header "From:" field when sending a site email. Usually the site name.</translate>
*<translate> '''Reply To Email'''. The email address that will be used to receive end user(s) reply.</translate>
*<translate> '''Reply To Name'''. Text displayed in the header "To:" field when end user(s) replying to received email.</translate>
*<translate> '''Mailer'''. Select which mailer for the delivery of site email.</translate>
{{anchor|logging}}
<translate>

===Logging=== 


[[<tvar name=1>Help4.x:Site_Global_Configuration_Logging</tvar>/en|Complete screenshot.]]

====Logging==== 
</translate>
*<translate> '''Path to Log Folder'''.</translate> <translate> Joomla can optionally keep a log file of its own and third party extensions' operations. Provide the absolute path to a folder that is writeable by PHP; if it's missing or is not writeable Joomla will not load at all. For security reasons you must not use a folder with system–wide access such as <tvar name=1>'/tmp'</tvar>.</translate>
*<translate> '''Log Almost Everything'''. Logs everything, except deprecated APIs.</translate>
*<translate> '''Log Deprecated API'''. Logs deprecated APIs.</translate>
<translate>

====Custom logging==== 
</translate>
*<translate> '''Log Priorities'''. Can be used to manage custom logging. Select the events you want to see in the log file. Default is 'All'. The item(s) can be selected/deselected by clicking the dropdown list.</translate>
*<translate> '''Log Categories'''. A comma separated list of log categories to include or exclude. Common log categories include but are not limited to: <tvar name=1>'database'</tvar>, <tvar name=2>'databasequery'</tvar>, <tvar name=3>'database-error'</tvar>, <tvar name=4>'deprecated'</tvar> and <tvar name=5>'jerror'</tvar>. If empty, custom logging is disabled.</translate>
*<translate> '''Log Category Mode'''. Sets the mode for the list of log categories above.</translate>
{{anchor|textfilters}}
<translate>

===Text Filters=== 


[[<tvar name=1>Help4.x:Site_Global_Configuration_Text_Filters</tvar>/en|Complete screenshot.]]


These text filter settings will be applied to all text editor fields submitted by users in the selected groups.


These filtering options give more control over the HTML your content providers submit. You can be as strict or as liberal as you require to suit your site's needs. The filtering is opt-in and the default settings provide good protection against markup commonly associated with website attacks.</translate>
{{anchor|permissions}}
<translate>

===Permissions=== 


[[<tvar name=1>Help4.x:Site_Global_Configuration_Permissions</tvar>/en|Complete screenshot.]]


Manage the permission settings for user groups.</translate>
*<translate> '''Site Login'''. Site Login for users in the selected group.</translate>
*<translate> '''Administrator Login'''. Administrator Login for users in the selected group.</translate>
*<translate> '''Web Services Login'''. Web Services Login for users in the selected group.</translate>
*<translate> '''Offline Access'''. Allows users in the selected group to access to the Frontend site when site is offline.</translate>
*<translate> '''Super User'''. Allows users in the selected selected group to perform any action over the whole site regardless of any other permission settings.</translate>
*<translate> '''Configure Options Only'''. Allows users in the group to edit the options except the permissions of any extension.</translate>
*<translate> '''Access Administration Interface'''. Allows users in the selected group to access all of the administration interface except Global Configuration.</translate>
*<translate> '''Create'''. Allows users in the selected group to create any content in any extension.</translate>
*<translate> '''Delete'''. Allows users in the selected group to delete any content in any extension.</translate>
*<translate> '''Edit'''. Allows users in the selected group to edit any content in any extension.</translate>
*<translate> '''Edit State'''. Allows users in the selected group to edit the state of any content in any extension.</translate>
*<translate> '''Edit Own'''. Allows users in the selected group to edit any content they own in any extension.</translate>
*<translate> '''Edit Custom Field Value'''. Allows users in the selected group to edit any value of custom fields submitted in any extension.</translate>
<translate> If you change the setting, it will apply to this and all child groups, components and content.</translate>
*<translate> Note that '''Denied''' will overrule any inherited setting and also the setting in any child group, component or content. In the case of a setting conflict, '''Deny''' will take precedence.</translate>
*<translate> '''Not Set''' is equivalent to '''Denied''' but can be changed in child groups, components and content.</translate>
<translate>

==Toolbar== 


At the top of the page you will see the toolbar shown in the [[<tvar name=1>#screenshot</tvar>|Screenshot]] above.</translate>
*<translate> '''Save'''. Saves the global configuration options and stays in the current screen.</translate>
*<translate> '''Save & Close'''. Saves the global configuration options and closes the current screen.</translate>
*<translate> '''Close'''. Closes the current screen and returns to the previous screen without saving any modifications you may have made.</translate>
*<translate> '''Toggle Inline Help'''. Show help text below some options.</translate>
*<translate> '''Help'''. Opens this help screen.</translate>
<translate>

==Quick Tips== 
</translate>
*<translate> Most of these settings can be set once and then left alone.</translate>
*<translate> If major modifications need to be made, then consider taking the site offline to test it and to make sure everything is in working order.</translate>
*<translate> The settings are saved in <tvar name=1>'[Joomla]/configuration.php'</tvar>. You have to either activate the FTP-layer or make the <tvar name=2>'configuration.php'</tvar> file writable to save your changes.</translate>
<translate>

==Related Information== 
</translate>
*<translate> [[<tvar name=1>Backup_Basics_for_a_Joomla!_Web_Site</tvar>/en|Backup Basics]]</translate>
*<translate> [[<tvar name=1>Security_Checklist</tvar>/en|Security Checklist]]</translate>
*<translate> [[<tvar name=1>J3.x:Access_Control_List_Tutorial</tvar>/en|Access Control List]]</translate> {{JVer|3.x|Joomla 3.x|long}}

{{Cathelp|4.0,4.1,4.2,4.3,4.4|Global Configuration Help Screens}}

Help5.x:Articles: Edit

2024-04-07T21:09:46Z

Heelc29: add help J5.1

<noinclude><languages /></noinclude>
<translate>

==Description== 
This screen is used to add a new or edit a existing Article, usually using a Wysiwyg editor. The default editor is TinyMCE but if other editors are installed the default editor may be set to something else for the site as a whole or for individual users.


Most parameters have suitable defaults but you might wish to set a specific Category or provide article-specific Metadata.

==How to Access== 
{{rarr|Content,Articles}}


To add a Article:
*click the '''New''' toolbar button
To edit a Article:
*select a '''Title''' from the list
{{anchor|screenshot}}

==Screenshot== 
[[File:Help-4x-content-article-manager-add-new-article-en.png|800px]]

==Form Fields== 
*'''Title'''. The Title for this article.
*'''Alias'''. The internal name of this article. Normally, you can leave this blank and Joomla will fill in a default value Title in lower case and with dashes instead of spaces. [[Alias/en|Learn more.]]
{{anchor|content}}

===Content=== 
'''Left Panel'''
*'''Article Text'''. This is where you enter the contents of the article. Joomla includes 3 editors, the default [[Help4.x:Editors/en#tinymce|Editor - TinyMCE]] is shown here.
<ul>
:[[File:Help-4x-Article-Editor-buttons-en.png|600px]]
The CMS Content dropdown list provides for access to link to an Article, Contact, Field, Media, Menu, or Module. [[Help4.x:Editors/en#cmscontent|Learn more.]]
</ul>
*'''Toggle Editor'''. A Toggle Editor button show below the edit window. This button allows you to toggle between TinyMCE and [[Help4.x:Editors/en#none|Editor - None]].
'''Right Panel'''
*'''Status'''. The published status of this article.
**Published: Article is visible in the Frontend of the site.
**Unpublished: Article is will not be visible to guests in the Frontend of the site. It may be visible to logged in users who have [[#permissions|edit state permission]] for the article.
**Archived: Article will no longer show on menu items [[Help4.x:Menu_Item:_Category_Blog/en|Category Blog]] or [[Help4.x:Menu_Item:_Category_List/en|Category List.]]
**Trashed: Article is deleted from the site but still in the database. [[J4.x:Deleting_an_Article/en|Learn more.]]
*'''Category'''. Select the Category for this article.
*'''Featured'''. Select Yes if article will be shown in the [[Help4.x:Menu_Item:_Featured_Articles/en|Featured menu item.]]
*'''Access'''. Select the viewing access level for this article. The access levels depend on what has been set up in [[Help4.x:Users:_Viewing_Access_Levels/en|Users: Access Levels]].
*'''Language'''. Select the language for this article. Keep the default of 'All' if you are not using the [[Help4.x:Extensions:_Languages/en|multi-language feature]].
*'''Tags'''. Assign tags to this article. You may select a tag from a [[Help4.x:Tags/en|pre-defined list]] or enter a new tag by typing the name in the field and pressing enter.
*'''Note'''. This is normally for the administrator's use (for example, to document information about this article) and does not show in the Frontend.
*'''Version Note'''. Optional field to identify the version of this article in the article's [[Help4.x:Components_Version_History/en|Version History]].
{{anchor|imagesandlinks}}

===Images and Links=== 
'''Note''': This can be hidden by a user with Admin permissions in the [[Help4.x:Articles:_Options/en|Article: Options]]. This section lets you display images and links in your articles using standardised layouts.


[[File:Help-4x-screenshot-article-edit-images-links-en.png|600px]]


'''Intro Image'''
*'''Intro Image'''. Click the Select button to select an image to be displayed in a fixed location in the Intro Text of this article. This will open a window that allows you to select an image from your images folder. [[Adding_an_image_to_an_article/en|Learn more.]]
*'''Image Description (Alt Text)'''. Set the alt attribute for this image. A few descriptive words for screen readers.
*'''No Description'''. Check in the rare instance of a purely decorative image. Note that if the Image Description is empty and the No Description checkbox is unchecked then the image will fail to meet accessibility criteria. If an image description is present this checkbox has no effect.
*'''Image Class'''. You can add any CSS class for your own styling ideas. For image position use for example float-start and float-end. [https://cassiopeia.joomla.com/help Learn more.]
*'''Caption'''. Create a caption for this image.
'''Full Article Image'''
*'''Full Article Image'''. Click the Select button to select an image to be displayed in a fixed location in the Full Text of this article. This will open a window that allows you to select an image from your images folder. [[Adding_an_image_to_an_article/en|Learn more.]]
*'''Image Description (Alt Text)'''. Set the alt attribute for this image. A few descriptive words for screen readers.
*'''No Description'''. Check in the rare instance of a purely decorative image. Note that if the Image Description is empty and the No Description checkbox is unchecked then the image will fail to meet accessibility criteria. If an image description is present this checkbox has no effect.
*'''Image Class'''. You can add any CSS class for your own styling ideas. For image position use for example float-start and float-end. [https://cassiopeia.joomla.com/help Learn more.]
*'''Caption'''. Enter an optional caption for this image.
'''Link A'''
*'''Link A'''. The URL for the first link to be displayed in a fixed location in the article text. This must be a full URL, not relative. For example, it normally would start with <nowiki>'https://'</nowiki>.
*'''Link A Text'''. The text used for Link A. If blank, the URL will be displayed.
*'''URL Target Window'''. Sets the default value for the target for the first Link in this article. Choices are:
**Open in parent window: Opens the in the main browser window, replacing the current Joomla article.
**Open in new window: Opens the link in a new browser window.
**Open in popup: Opens the link in a pop-up browser window (without full navigation controls).
**Modal: Opens the link in a modal pop-up window.
'''Link B''', '''Link C''': Same options as Link A.
{{anchor|options}}

===Options=== 
'''Note''': This can be hidden by a user with Admin permissions in the [[Help4.x:Articles:_Options/en|Article: Options]]. This is a set of options you can use to control how this article will show in the Frontend.
:[[File:Help-4x-screenshot-article-edit-article-options-en.png|600px]]
'''Layout'''
*'''Layout'''. Use a layout from the supplied article view or [[Help4.x:Templates:_Customise/en|overrides in the templates]].
*'''Title'''. Show the Article's Title.
*'''Linked Titles'''. Show the title as a link to the article.
*'''Tags'''. Enter tags for this article. Select existing tags by entering in the first few letters or create new tags by entering them here. [[J4.x:How_To_Use_Content_Tags_in_Joomla/en|Learn more.]]
*{{anchor|introtext}}'''Intro Text'''.
**Show: The Intro Text of the article will show when you drill down to the article.
**Hide: Only the part of the article after the Read More break will show.
*'''Position of Article Info'''.
**Above: Puts the article information block above the text.
**Below: Puts the article information block below the text.
**Split: Splits the article information block into 2 separate blocks. One block is above and the other is below the text.
*'''Article Info Title'''. Displays 'Details' on top of the article information block.
'''Category'''
*'''Category'''. Show the Article's Category Title.
*'''Link Category'''. Show the title as a link to that Category.
*'''Parent Category'''. Show the Article's Parent Category Title.
*'''Link Parent Category'''. Show the title as a link to that Category.
'''Associations'''
*'''Associations'''. Show the associated flags or Language Code. [[Help4.x:Multilingual_Associations/en|Multilingual only.]]
'''Author'''
*'''Author'''. Show the author of the Article.
*'''Link to Author's Contact Page'''. Show it as a link to a Contact layout for that author.{{-}}Note: The author must be [[Help4.x:Contacts/en|set up as a Contact]].
'''Date'''
*'''Create Date'''. Show the Article's create date.
*'''Modify Date'''. Show the Article's modify date.
*'''Publish Date'''. Show the Article's start publishing date.
'''Options'''
*'''Navigation'''. Show a navigation link 'Prev' or 'Next' when you drill down to the article.
*'''Hits'''. Show the number of times the article has been displayed by a user.
*'''Unauthorised Links'''. If Yes, the Intro Text for restricted articles will show. Clicking on the Read more link will require users to log in to view the full article content.
*'''Positioning of the Links.'''
**Above: Links are shown above the content.
**Below: Links are shown below the content.
*'''Read More Text'''. Customise the text that shows for the default wording 'Read more'.
*'''Browser Page Title'''. Text for the Browser page title to be used when the article is viewed with a non-article menu item. If blank, the article's title is used instead.

===Fields=== 
This section shows the [[Help4.x:Fields/en|custom fields]] which are defined for this article.


[[File:Help-4x-Content-Article-Manager-Edit-Fields-options-subscreen-en.png|600px]]
{{anchor|publishing}}

===Publishing=== 
'''Note''': This can be hidden by a user with Admin permissions in the [[Help4.x:Articles:_Options/en|Article: Options]]. This section allows you to enter parameters and [[Using_The_Meta_Description/en|Metadata]] for this Article.


[[File:Help-4x-Content-Article-Manager-Edit-publishing-options-subscreen-en.png|600px|none]]


'''Publishing'''
*'''Start Publishing'''. Date and time to start publishing. Enter article ahead of time and then have it published automatically at a future time.
*'''Finish Publishing'''. Date and time to finish publishing. The article is automatically changed to Unpublished state at a future time.
*'''Start Featured'''. Date and time to start featured state. Enter article ahead of time and then have it featured automatically at a future time.
*'''Finish Featured'''. Date and time to finish featured state. The article is automatically changed to Unfeatured state at a future time.
*'''Created Date'''. The current time when the Article was created. Enter in a different date and time or click on the calendar icon to find the desired date.
*'''Created By'''. Name of the User who created this Article. This will default to the currently logged-in user. If you want to change this to a different user, click the Select User button.{{anchor|createdbyalias}}
*'''Created by Alias'''. Enter in an alias for the Author of this Article. This allows you to display a different Author name.
*'''Modified Date'''. Date of last modification.
*'''Modified By'''. Username who performed the last modification.
*'''Revision'''. Number of revisions to this Article.
*'''Hits'''. The number of times this Article has been viewed.
*'''ID'''. A unique identification number for this Article, you cannot change this number. When creating a new Article, this field displays "0" until you save the new entry.
'''Metadata'''
*'''Meta Description'''. An paragraph to be used as the description of the page. [[Using_The_Meta_Description/en|Learn more.]]
*'''Keywords'''. Entry for keywords. [[Using_Keywords/en|Learn more.]]
*'''Robots'''. The instructions for web 'robots' that browse to this page. Set 'Use Global' in [[Help4.x:Site_Global_Configuration/en#robots|Global Configuration]].
*'''Author'''. Entry for an Author name within the metadata.
*'''Content Rights'''. Describe what rights others have to use this content.
{{anchor|associations}}

===Associations=== 
'''Note''': This can be hidden by a user with Admin permissions in the [[Help4.x:Articles:_Options/en|Article: Options]]. Tab is shown on [[Help4.x:Multilingual_Associations/en|Multilingual Sites]] only.


[[File:Help-4x-screenshot-article-edit-associations-en.png|600px]]
{{anchor|configureeditscreen}}

===Configure Edit Screen=== 
'''Note''': This can be hidden by a user with Admin permissions in the [[Help4.x:Articles:_Options/en|Article: Options]].
:[[File:Help-4x-screenshot-article-edit-configure-edit-screen-en.png|600px]]
*'''Publishing Options'''. If Hide, the [[Help4.x:Articles:_Edit/en#publishing|Publishing Options tab]] will not show in the Backend. This means that Backend users will not be able to edit the fields in this tab. These fields will always be set to their default values.
*'''Article Options'''. If Hide, the [[Help4.x:Articles:_Edit/en#options|Article Options tab]] will not show in the Backend. This means that Backend users will not be able to edit the fields in this tab. These fields will always be set to their default values.
*'''Administrator Images and Links'''. If Yes, the [[Help4.x:Articles:_Edit/en#imagesandlinks|Images and Links tab]] will show.
*'''Frontend Images and Links'''. If Yes, the Images and Links tab will show in the Frontend article editor screen.
{{anchor|permissions}}

===Permissions=== 
'''Note''': This can be hidden by a user with Admin permissions in the [[Help4.x:Articles:_Options/en|Article: Options]]. This is where you can enter permissions for this article. [[J3.x:Access_Control_List_Tutorial/en#hierarchylevels|Learn more.]]
:[[File:Help-4x-screenshot-article-edit-permissions-en.png|600px]]
To change the permissions for this article, do the following.
#Select the '''Group''' by clicking its title located on the left.
#Find the desired '''Action'''.
#*'''Delete'''. Users can delete this article.
#*'''Edit'''. Users can edit this article.
#*'''Edit State'''. User can change the published state and related information for this article.
#Select the desired permission for the action you wish to change.
#*'''Inherited'''. Inherited for users in this Group from the [[Help4.x:Site_Global_Configuration/en#permissions|Global Configuration]], [[Help4.x:Articles:_Options/en#permissions|Articles Options]], or [[Help4.x:Articles:_Edit_Category/en#permissions|Articles Category]].
#*'''Allowed'''. Allowed for users in this Group.{{-}}Note: If this action is Denied at one of the higher levels, the Allowed permission here will not take effect. A Denied setting cannot be overridden.
#*'''Denied'''. Denied for users in this Group.
#Click '''Save''' in '''Toolbar''' at top. When the screen refreshes, the Calculated Setting column will show the effective permission for this Group and Action.

==Toolbar== 
At the top of the page you will see the toolbar shown in the [[#screenshot|Screenshot]] above.
*'''Save'''. Saves the article and stays in the current screen.
*'''Save & Close'''. Saves the article and closes the current screen.
**'''Save & New'''. Saves the article and keeps the editing screen open and ready to create another article.
**'''Save to Menu'''. Saves the article to a menu item and opens the menu item screen.
**'''Save as Copy'''. Saves your changes to a copy of the current article. Does not affect the current article.
*'''Close'''. Closes the current screen and returns to the previous screen without saving any modifications you may have made.
*'''Versions'''. Opens the Article Version History window to show any prior versions of this article. This allows you to view older versions of this article and, if desired, restore from an older version. [[Help4.x:Components_Version_History/en|Learn more.]]
*'''Preview'''. Opens a modal dialog showing a site view of this article. Requires [[Help4.x:Site_Global_Configuration/en#sharedsessions|shared sessions]] or being logged in into the Frontend.
*'''Accessibility Check'''. Opens a window showing accessibility check results of the article.
*'''Associations'''. With a specific language set for an article, allows side by side editing in another language. This icon is shown on [[Help4.x:Multilingual_Associations/en|Multilingual Sites]] only.
*'''Toggle Inline Help'''. Show help text below some options.
*'''Help'''. Opens this help screen.

==Quick Tips== 
*There are 2 methods to insert an image into article using the TinyMCE editor.
*#The [[Help4.x:Editors/en#cmscontent|CMS Content]] dropdown list provides access to the [[Help4.x:Media/en|Media screen]] that lets you browse image files and upload images.
*#The 'Insert' dropdown list is a simple form for which you need to know the image url. It is used for external images.
*[[Help4.x:Editors/en#readmore|Read more]] breaks allow you to save space on the Front Page or on any blog layout page by showing just the first portion of an Article. [[Help4.x:Editors/en#pagebreak|Page break]] allow you to provide multi-page navigation for long Articles. You can use both on one Article, if desired.{{-}}For example, you could put a Read more break after the first paragraph of a multi-page article, and have Page breaks after each page. No page navigation would display on the Front Page until the User selects the Read more link. At that time, the Article's table of contents would display showing links to every page.

==Related Information== 
{{:Chunk4x:Help_screen_related_Articles/en}}

</translate>
{{Cathelp|5.0,5.1|Article Manager Help Screens|Content Help Screens}}

Help5.x:Articles: Categories

2024-04-07T21:09:09Z

Heelc29: add help J5.1

<noinclude><languages /></noinclude>
<translate>

==Description== 
The Articles Categories list is used to find, add, and edit articles categories.


Categories are are used to organise Articles for ease of management and display. They can be organised into tree-like structures like file systems. All Articles must be assigned either to a parent Category or a child Category.

==How to Access== 
{{rarr|Home Dashboard,Inhoud,Categories}}


To add a Category:
*click the '''New''' toolbar button
To edit a Category:
*select a '''Title''' from the list
{{anchor|screenshot}}

==Screenshot== 
[[File:Help-4x-Content-Categories-screen-en.png|800px|none]]

==Column Headers== 
*'''Checkbox'''. Check this box to select categories. To select all categories, check the box in the column heading. After boxes are checked the toolbar button 'Actions' get active.
*{{anchor|ordering}}'''Ordering'''. You can change the order of an category within a list as follows:
**Select the Ordering icon [[File:Help-4x-Ordering-colheader-icon.png|9px||Ordering icon]] in the List heading to make it active.
**Select one of the Three dots icons [[File:Help-4x-Ordering-colheader-grab-bar-icon.png|5px|||Three dots icon]] and drag it up or down to change the position of that row in the list.
**In the Filter Options you may limit the list to categories that are assigned for example to a Language.
*'''Status'''. Status of category. Hover icon for informations.
*'''Title'''. The title of the category. Edit the category by clicking on the Title.
*'''Icons'''. Counts of number of Published, Unpublished, Archived and Trashed Articles in each Category. Click on a number to get a list of the categories.
*'''Access'''. The viewing [[Help4.x:Users:_Viewing_Access_Levels/en|Access Level]] for this category.
*'''Associations'''. Shows the associated categories. Click on the Language Code to open the category. [[Help4.x:Multilingual_Associations/en|Multilingual only.]]
*'''Language'''. Categories language, default is 'All'.
*'''ID'''. A unique identification number for this category, you cannot change this number.

==List Filters== 
'''Search bar'''. Near the top of the page you will see the search bar shown in the [[#screenshot|Screenshot]] above.
*'''Search by Text'''. Enter part of the search term and click the Search icon. ''Hover'' to see a ''Tooltip'' indicating which fields will be searched.{{-}}To 'Search by ID' enter "id:x", where "x" is the ID number (for example, "id:19").
*'''Filter Options'''. Click to display the additional filters.
*'''Clear'''. Click to clear the Filter field and restore the list to its unfiltered state.
*'''Ordering'''. Shows the current list ordering field. 2 ways to change the order:
**Select from the dropdown list. Ordering may be in ascending or descending order.
**Click a column heading. The column heading toggles between ascending and descending order.
*'''Number to Display'''. Shows the number of categories in a list. Select from the dropdown list to change the number displayed.{{-}}The default for a site is '20' but this may be changed in the [[Help4.x:Site_Global_Configuration/en#defaultlistlimit|Global Configuration]].

===Filter Options=== 
Near the top of the page you will see the filter bar shown in the [[#screenshot|Screenshot]] above.
*'''Select Status'''. Select from Trashed / Unpublished / Published / Archived / All.
*'''Select Access'''. Select from the list of available viewing access levels.
*'''Select Language'''. Select from the list of available languages.
*'''Select Tag'''. Select from the list of available tags.
*'''Select Max Levels'''. Select from the list of available levels.

===Pagination=== 
'''Page Controls'''. When the number of categories is more than one page, you will see a page control bar near the bottom of the page shown in the [[#screenshot|Screenshot]] above. The current page number being viewed has a dark colour background.
*'''Start'''. Click to go to the first page.
*'''Prev'''. Click to go to the previous page.
*'''Page numbers'''. Click to go to the desired page.
*'''Next'''. Click to go to the next page.
*'''End'''. Click to go to the last page.

==Toolbar== 
At the top of the page you will see the toolbar shown in the [[#screenshot|Screenshot]] above.
*'''New'''. Opens the editing screen to create a new category.
*'''Actions'''. Reveals a list of actions for selected categories. Check one or more categories checkboxes to activate the list.
**'''Publish'''. Makes the selected categories available to visitors to your website.
**'''Unpublish'''. Makes the selected categories unavailable to visitors to your website.
**'''Archive'''. Changes the status of the selected categories to indicate that they are archived. [[J4.x:How_to_Archive_an_Article/en|Learn more.]]
**'''Check-In'''. Checks-in the selected categories.
**'''Trash'''. Changes the status of the selected categories to indicate that they are trashed. [[J4.x:Deleting_an_Article/en|Learn more.]]
**'''Batch'''. Batch processes the selected categories.
*'''Rebuild'''. Reconstructs and refreshes the categories table. Normally, you do not need to rebuild this table. This function is provided in case the data in the table becomes corrupted.
*'''Options'''. Opens [[Help4.x:Articles:_Options/en|Articles: Options]].
*'''Help'''. Opens this help screen.

==Batch Process== 
The Batch Process allows a change in settings for a group of selected categories.


[[File:Help-4x-Content-Categories-batch-en.png|600px|none]]


'''How to Batch Process''' a group of categories:
# Select one or more categories on the list by checking the desired checkboxes.
# Click the Batch Toolbar button.
# Set one or more of the following values:
#* To change the '''Language''', select the desired language from the Set Language list box.
#* To change the '''Access Levels''', select the desired new access level from the Set Access Level list box.
#* To change the '''Category''', select a category. To leave the category unchanged, use the default value of 'Select'.
#** To '''copy''' the categories to a different category, select the desired category from the category list box and check the Copy option. In this case, the original categories are unchanged and the copies are assigned to the new category and, if selected, the new language, access level, and tag.
#** To '''move''' the categories to a different category, select the desired category from the category list box and check the Move option. In this case, the original categories will be moved to a new category and, if selected, be assigned the new language, access level, and tag.
#* To add '''Tags''', select the desired Tags from the dropdown or choose to keep the tags currently added to the original categories.
# When all of the settings are entered, click on Process to perform the changes. A message '''"Batch process completed successfully."''' will show.

==Quick Tips== 
*Click on the icon in the Status column to toggle between Published and Unpublished.

==Related Information== 
*[[Help4.x:Articles:_Edit_Category/en|Articles: Edit Category]]
*[[Help4.x:Home_Dashboard/en|Home Dashboard]]: Access to many default Joomla functions.{{:Chunk4x:Help_screen_related_Articles/en}}

</translate>
{{Cathelp|5.0,5.1|Article Manager Help Screens|Content Help Screens}}

Help5.x:Articles

2024-04-07T21:08:36Z

Heelc29: add help J5.1

<noinclude><languages /></noinclude>
<translate>

==Description== 
The Articles list is used to find, mark featured, add, and edit articles.


Articles are the basic units of information in the content system and the bottom level in the content hierarchy. Each Article is in exactly one Category.

==How to Access== 
{{rarr|Home Dashboard,Content,Articles}}


To add an Article:
*click the '''New''' toolbar button
To edit a Article:
*select a '''Title''' from the list
{{anchor|screenshot}}

==Screenshot== 
[[File:Help-4x-Content-Article-screen-en.png|800px]]

==Column Headers== 
*'''Checkbox'''. Check this box to select articles. To select all articles, check the box in the column heading. After boxes are checked the toolbar button 'Actions' get active.
*{{anchor|ordering}}'''Ordering'''. You can change the order of an article within a list as follows:
**Select the Ordering icon [[File:Help-4x-Ordering-colheader-icon.png|9px||Ordering icon]] in the List heading to make it active.
**Select one of the Three dots icons [[File:Help-4x-Ordering-colheader-grab-bar-icon.png|5px|||Three dots icon]] and drag it up or down to change the position of that row in the list.
**In the Filter Options you may limit the list to articles that are assigned for example to a Language.
*'''Featured'''. Click the icon to toggle. The article will show on the [[Help4.x:Articles:_Featured/en|Featured Articles]] page.
*'''Status'''. Status of article. Hover icon for informations.
*'''Title'''. The title of the article. Edit the article by clicking on the Title.
*'''Access'''. The viewing [[Help4.x:Users:_Viewing_Access_Levels/en|Access Level]] for this article.
*'''Author'''. Name of the User who created this article.
*'''Associations'''. Shows the associated articles. Click on the Language Code to open the article. [[Help4.x:Multilingual_Associations/en|Multilingual only.]]
*'''Language'''. Articles language, default is 'All'.
*'''Date Created'''. The date this article was created.
*'''Hits'''. The number of times an article has been viewed.
*'''ID'''. A unique identification number for this article, you cannot change this number.

==List Filters== 
'''Search bar'''. Near the top of the page you will see the search bar shown in the [[#screenshot|Screenshot]] above.
*'''Search by Text'''. Enter part of the search term and click the Search icon. ''Hover'' to see a ''Tooltip'' indicating which fields will be searched.{{-}}To 'Search by ID' enter "id:x", where "x" is the ID number (for example, "id:19").
*'''Filter Options'''. Click to display the additional filters.
*'''Clear'''. Click to clear the Filter field and restore the list to its unfiltered state.
*'''Ordering'''. Shows the current list ordering field. 2 ways to change the order:
**Select from the dropdown list. Ordering may be in ascending or descending order.
**Click a column heading. The column heading toggles between ascending and descending order.
*'''Number to Display'''. Shows the number of articles in a list. Select from the dropdown list to change the number displayed.{{-}}The default for a site is '20' but this may be changed in the [[Help4.x:Site_Global_Configuration/en#defaultlistlimit|Global Configuration]].

===Filter Options=== 
Near the top of the page you will see the filter bar shown in the [[#screenshot|Screenshot]] above.
*'''Select Featured'''. Select from Unfeatured Articles / Featured Articles.
*'''Select Status'''. Select from Trashed / Unpublished / Published / Archived / All.
*'''Select Category'''. Select from the list of available categories.
*'''Select Access'''. Select from the list of available viewing access levels.
*'''Select Author'''. Select from the list of available authors.
*'''Select Language'''. Select from the list of available languages.
*'''Select Tag'''. Select from the list of available tags.
*'''Select Max Levels'''. Select from the list of available levels.

===Pagination=== 
'''Page Controls'''. When the number of articles is more than one page, you will see a page control bar near the bottom of the page shown in the [[#screenshot|Screenshot]] above. The current page number being viewed has a dark colour background.
*'''Start'''. Click to go to the first page.
*'''Prev'''. Click to go to the previous page.
*'''Page numbers'''. Click to go to the desired page.
*'''Next'''. Click to go to the next page.
*'''End'''. Click to go to the last page.

==Toolbar== 
At the top of the page you will see the toolbar shown in the [[#screenshot|Screenshot]] above.
*'''New'''. Opens the editing screen to create a new article.
*'''Actions'''. Reveals a list of actions for selected articles. Check one or more articles checkboxes to activate the list.
**'''Publish'''. Makes the selected articles available to visitors to your website.
**'''Unpublish'''. Makes the selected articles unavailable to visitors to your website.
**'''Feature'''. Marks selected articles as featured.
**'''Unfeature'''. Changes the status of featured articles to unfeatured.
**'''Archive'''. Changes the status of the selected articles to indicate that they are archived. [[J4.x:How_to_Archive_an_Article/en|Learn more.]]
**'''Check-in'''. Checks-in the selected articles.
**'''Trash'''. Changes the status of the selected articles to indicate that they are trashed. [[J4.x:Deleting_an_Article/en|Learn more.]]
**'''Batch'''. Batch processes the selected articles.
*'''Options'''. Opens [[Help4.x:Articles:_Options/en|Articles: Options]].
*'''Help'''. Opens this help screen.

==Batch Process== 
The Batch Process allows a change in settings for a group of selected articles.


[[File:Help-4x-batch-process-articles-en.png|600px]]


'''How to Batch Process''' a group of articles:
# Select one or more articles on the list by checking the desired checkboxes.
# Click the Batch Toolbar button.
# Set one or more of the following values:
#* To change the '''Language''', select the desired new language from the Set Language list box.
#* To change the '''Access Levels''', select the desired new access level from the Set Access Level list box.
#* To change the '''Category''', select a category. To leave the category unchanged, use the default value of 'Select'.
#** To '''copy''' the articles to a different category, select the desired category from the category list box and check the Copy option. In this case, the original articles are unchanged and the copies are assigned to the new category and, if selected, the new language, access level, and tag.
#** To '''move''' the articles to a different category, select the desired category from the category list box and check the Move option. In this case, the original articles will be moved to a new category and, if selected, be assigned the new language, access level, and tag.
#* To add '''Tags''', select the desired Tags from the dropdown or choose to keep the tags currently added to the original articles.
# When all of the settings are entered, click on Process to perform the changes. A message '''"Batch process completed successfully."''' will show.

==Quick Tips== 
*If Joomla is installed without sample data, one article category called 'Uncategorised' is created automatically.
*To see trashed and archived articles, set the Status filter to 'All'.
*To change the ordering of articles within a category, click on the Ordering column heading to sort by this column. Also, it is easier to see the ordering if you filter on the desired category.

==Related Information== 
*[[Help4.x:Home_Dashboard/en|Home Dashboard]]: Access to many default Joomla functions.{{:Chunk4x:Help_screen_related_Articles/en}}

</translate>
{{Cathelp|5.0,5.1|Article Manager Help Screens|Content Help Screens}}

Joomla! CMS versions

2024-03-09T19:47:21Z

Heelc29: Fix End of Life of J5.0

<noinclude><languages /></noinclude>
{{Joomla version|version={{CurrentSTSVer4|maintenance}}|comment='''<translate> Bridge Version</translate>'''}}
{{Joomla version|version={{CurrentSTSVer5|maintenance}}|comment='''<translate>  Stable Version</translate>'''}}

<translate>
Check for the latest Joomla! CMS version. If you are not on the latest release, read the release notes to see if you need to upgrade. If a release is being made in order to address security issues then it is strongly advised that you upgrade as soon as possible. You can see the release history of each series in the table below. Click the '''version history link''' in the notes column to find details on exact release date, release notes and package and MD5s.</translate>

<translate>
*Normally, you should use the latest version of Joomla! for a new site unless you have a specific reason not to.</translate>
<translate>
*The latest version can be downloaded from [https://downloads.joomla.org Joomla! Downloads site].</translate>
<translate>
* Make sure you subscribe to the [https://developer.joomla.org/security-centre.html Joomla! Security Announcements] feed. This RSS feed is used to make announcements, including the availability of new releases, that could affect the security of your site. You have the option to subscribe to this feed by RSS or email.</translate>
<translate>
* If you are running an earlier release of the current version (for example, you are running 3.1.6 and the current version is 3.4.1), you should upgrade to the current version. Each minor release fixes a number of bugs and security issues. It is always good practice to upgrade to the latest maintenance version as a first step in troubleshooting a problem and fixing any newly discovered security issues.</translate>
<translate>

* See the [https://developer.joomla.org/roadmap.html Joomla! Project Roadmap] for the time frames of all future releases.</translate>
<translate>
==Joomla! CMS Versions== 
</translate>
{| border=1 cellpadding=2 cellspacing=0 style="text-align:center; border-collapse:collapse; border-color:#000;"
| rowspan=2 style="text-align:center; background-color:#4a86e8; font-weight:bold;" | <translate>
CMS Version</translate>
| rowspan=2 style="text-align:center; background-color:#4a86e8; font-weight:bold;" | <translate>
Available</translate>
| colspan=2 style="text-align:center; background-color:#4a86e8; font-weight:bold;" | <translate>
Support</translate>
| style='display:none;' |
| rowspan=2 style="text-align:center; background-color:#4a86e8; font-weight:bold;" | <translate>
End of Life</translate>
| rowspan=2 style="text-align:center; background-color:#4a86e8; font-weight:bold;" | <translate>
Upgrade Type</translate>
| rowspan=2 style="text-align:center; background-color:#4a86e8; font-weight:bold;" | <translate>
Notes</translate>
| rowspan=2 style="text-align:center; background-color:#4a86e8; font-weight:bold;" | <translate>
Latest Release</translate>
|-
| style='display:none;' |
| style='display:none;' |
| style="text-align:center; background-color:#4a86e8; font-weight:bold;" | <translate>
Bugs</translate>
| style="text-align:center; background-color:#4a86e8; font-weight:bold;" | <translate>
Security</translate>
| style='display:none;' |
| style='display:none;' |
| style='display:none;' |
| style='display:none;' |
|-
| style="background-color:#d9ead3; font-weight:bold;" | 5.0
| style="background-color:#d9ead3;" | [[File:Checkmark.png|center]]
| style="background-color:#d9ead3;" | [[File:Checkmark.png|center]]
| style="background-color:#d9ead3;" | [[File:Checkmark.png|center]]
| style="background-color:#d9ead3;" | 5.1 release
| style="background-color:#d9ead3;" | <translate>  One-click</translate>
| style="background-color:#d9ead3;" | <translate>  Recommended for all new installations [[S:MyLanguage/Joomla 5.0 version history|Joomla! 5.0 version history]]</translate>
| style="background-color:#d9ead3;" | {{CurrentSTSVer5|maintenance}}
|-
| style="background-color:#d9ead3; font-weight:bold;" | 4.4
| style="background-color:#d9ead3;" | [[File:Checkmark.png|center]]
| style="background-color:#d9ead3;" | [[File:Checkmark.png|center]]
| style="background-color:#d9ead3;" | [[File:Checkmark.png|center]]
| style="background-color:#d9ead3;" | October 17 2025
| style="background-color:#d9ead3;" | <translate>  Migration to Joomla! 5.0</translate>
| style="background-color:#d9ead3;" | <translate>  Upgrade to {{CurrentSTSVer5|maintenance}} now [[S:MyLanguage/Joomla 4.4 version history|Joomla! 4.4 version history]]</translate>
| style="background-color:#d9ead3;" | {{CurrentSTSVer4|maintenance}}
|-
| style="background-color:#f4cccc; font-weight:bold;" | 4.3
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | [[File:X-mark.png|center]]
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | [[File:X-mark.png|center]]
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | [[File:X-mark.png|center]]
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | 4.4 release
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | <translate> One-click</translate>
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | <translate> Upgrade to {{CurrentSTSVer4|maintenance}} now [[S:MyLanguage/Joomla 4.3 version history|Joomla! 4.3 version history]]</translate>
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | 4.3.4
|-|-
| style="background-color:#f4cccc; font-weight:bold;" | 4.2
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | [[File:X-mark.png|center]]
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | [[File:X-mark.png|center]]
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | [[File:X-mark.png|center]]
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | 4.3 release
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | <translate>  One-click</translate>
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | <translate>  Upgrade to {{CurrentSTSVer4|maintenance}} now [[S:MyLanguage/Joomla 4.2 version history|Joomla! 4.2 version history]]</translate>
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | 4.2.9
|-
| style="background-color:#f4cccc; font-weight:bold;" | 4.1
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | [[File:X-mark.png|center]]
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | [[File:X-mark.png|center]]
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | [[File:X-mark.png|center]]
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | 4.2 release
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | <translate> One-click</translate>
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | <translate> Upgrade to {{CurrentSTSVer4|maintenance}} now [[S:MyLanguage/Joomla 4.1 version history|Joomla! 4.1 version history]]</translate>
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | 4.1.5
|-
| style="background-color:#f4cccc; font-weight:bold;" | 4.0
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | [[File:X-mark.png|center]]
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | [[File:X-mark.png|center]]
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | [[File:X-mark.png|center]]
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | 4.1 release
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | <translate> Migration from Joomla! 3.10</translate>
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | <translate> Upgrade to {{CurrentSTSVer4|maintenance}} now [[S:MyLanguage/Joomla 4.0 version history|Joomla! 4.0 version history]]</translate>
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | 4.0.6
|-
| style="background-color:#f4cccc; font-weight:bold;" | 3.10
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | [[File:X-mark.png|center]]
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | [[File:X-mark.png|center]]
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | [[File:X-mark.png|center]]
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | 17.08.2023
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | <translate> One-click from Joomla! 3.9</translate>
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | <translate> Recommended for migration to Joomla! 4 [[S:MyLanguage/Joomla 3.10 version history|Joomla! 3.10 version history]]</translate>
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | {{CurrentSTSVer|maintenance}}
|-
| style="background-color:#f4cccc; font-weight:bold;" | 3.9
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | [[File:X-mark.png|center]]
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | [[File:X-mark.png|center]]
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | [[File:X-mark.png|center]]
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | <translate> 3.10 release</translate>
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | <translate> One-click</translate>
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | <translate> Upgrade to {{CurrentSTSVer|maintenance}} now [[S:MyLanguage/Joomla 3.9 version history|Joomla! 3.9 version history]]</translate>
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | 3.9.28
|-
| style="background-color:#f4cccc; font-weight:bold;" | 3.8
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | [[File:X-mark.png|center]]
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | [[File:X-mark.png|center]]
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | [[File:X-mark.png|center]]
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | <translate> 3.9 release</translate>
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | <translate> One-click</translate>
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | <translate> Upgrade to {{CurrentSTSVer|maintenance}} now [[S:MyLanguage/Joomla 3.8 version history|Joomla! 3.8 version history]]</translate>
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | 3.8.13
|-
| style="background-color:#f4cccc; font-weight:bold;" | 3.7
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | [[File:X-mark.png|center]]
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | [[File:X-mark.png|center]]
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | [[File:X-mark.png|center]]
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | <translate> 3.8 release</translate>
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | <translate> One-click</translate>
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | <translate>

Upgrade to {{CurrentSTSVer|maintenance}} now [[S:MyLanguage/Joomla 3.7 version history|Joomla! 3.7 version history]]</translate>
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | 3.7.5
|-
| style="background-color:#f4cccc; font-weight:bold;" | 3.6
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | [[File:X-mark.png|center]]
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | [[File:X-mark.png|center]]
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | [[File:X-mark.png|center]]
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | <translate>
3.7 release</translate>
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | <translate>
One-click</translate>
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | <translate>
Upgrade to {{CurrentSTSVer|maintenance}} now [[S:MyLanguage/Joomla 3.6 version history|Joomla! 3.6 version history]]</translate>
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | 3.6.5
|-
| style="background-color:#f4cccc; font-weight:bold;" | 3.5
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | [[File:X-mark.png|center]]
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | [[File:X-mark.png|center]]
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | [[File:X-mark.png|center]]
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | <translate>
3.6 release</translate>
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | <translate>
One-click</translate>
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | <translate>
Upgrade to {{CurrentSTSVer|maintenance}} now [[S:MyLanguage/Joomla 3.5 version history|Joomla 3.5 version history]]</translate>
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | 3.5.1
|-
| style="background-color:#f4cccc; font-weight:bold;" | 3.4
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | [[File:X-mark.png|center]]
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | [[File:X-mark.png|center]]
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | [[File:X-mark.png|center]]
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | <translate>
3.5 release</translate>
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | <translate>
One-click</translate>
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | <translate>

Upgrade to {{CurrentSTSVer|maintenance}} now [[Joomla 3.4 version history]]</translate>
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | 3.4.8
|-
| style="background-color:#f4cccc; font-weight:bold;" | 3.3
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | [[File:X-mark.png|center]]
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | [[File:X-mark.png|center]]
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | [[File:X-mark.png|center]]
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | <translate>
3.4 release</translate>
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | <translate>
One-click</translate>
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | <translate>
Upgrade to {{CurrentSTSVer|maintenance}} now</translate> <translate>

[[Joomla 3.3 version history]]</translate>
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | 3.3.6
|-
| style="background-color:#f4cccc; font-weight:bold;" | 3.2
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | [[File:X-mark.png|center]]
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | [[File:X-mark.png|center]]
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | [[File:X-mark.png|center]]
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | <translate>
Oct 2014<ref>Bug fixes will cease April 2014, security fixes only, see [https://community.joomla.org/blogs/leadership/raising-the-bar-on-security.html Raising The Bar On Security]. <blockquote>"Also, for the six months after Joomla! 3.3 is released, the Joomla! Project will be releasing Security Updates for both 3.2 '''and''' 3.3 so any new vulnerabilities can be promptly patched with a one-click update without the need to immediately update to Joomla! 3.3, giving you time to request your hosting provider to update their PHP version."</blockquote></ref></translate>
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | <translate>
One-click</translate>
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | <translate>
Upgrade server's PHP to 5.3.10 or greater and upgrade to {{CurrentSTSVer|maintenance}} now [[Joomla 3.2 version history]]</translate>
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | 3.2.7
|-
| style="background-color:#f4cccc; font-weight:bold;" | 3.1
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | [[File:X-mark.png|center]]
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | [[File:X-mark.png|center]]
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | [[File:X-mark.png|center]]
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | <translate>
Dec 2013</translate>
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | <translate>
One-click</translate>
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | <translate>
Upgrade to {{CurrentSTSVer|maintenance}} now</translate> <translate>
[[Joomla 3.1 version history]]</translate>
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | 3.1.6
|-
| style="background-color:#f4cccc; width:100px; font-weight:bold;" | 3.0
| style="background-color:#f4cccc; width:100px;" | [[File:X-mark.png|center]]
| style="background-color:#f4cccc; width:100px;" | [[File:X-mark.png|center]]
| style="background-color:#f4cccc; width:100px;" | [[File:X-mark.png|center]]
| style="background-color:#f4cccc; width:100px;" | <translate>
May 2013</translate>
| style="background-color:#f4cccc; width:100px;" | <translate>
One-click</translate>
| style="background-color:#f4cccc; width:306px;" | <translate>
Upgrade to {{CurrentSTSVer|maintenance}} now [[Joomla 3.0 version history]]</translate>
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | 3.0.4
|-
| style="background-color:#f4cccc; font-weight:bold;" | 2.5
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | [[File:X-mark.png|center]]
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | [[File:X-mark.png|center]]
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | [[File:X-mark.png|center]]
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | <translate>
December 31st, 2014</translate>
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | <translate>
Migration to 3.x</translate>
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | <translate>
Upgrade to</translate> {{CurrentSTSVer}} <translate>
now</translate> <translate>
[[Joomla 2.5 version history]]</translate>
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | {{CurrentLTSVer|maintanence}}
|-
| style="background-color:#f4cccc; font-weight:bold;" | 1.7
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | [[File:X-mark.png|center]]
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | [[File:X-mark.png|center]]
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | [[File:X-mark.png|center]]
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | <translate>
Feb 2012</translate>
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | <translate>
Migration to 3.x</translate>
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | <translate>
Plan to migrate to {{CurrentSTSVer|maintenance}} now [[Joomla 1.7 version history]]</translate>
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | 1.7.5
|-
| style="background-color:#f4cccc; font-weight:bold;" | 1.6
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | [[File:X-mark.png|center]]
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | [[File:X-mark.png|center]]
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | [[File:X-mark.png|center]]
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | <translate>
Aug 2011</translate>
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | <translate>
Migration to 3.x</translate>
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | <translate>
Plan to migrate to {{CurrentSTSVer|maintenance}} now [[Joomla 1.6 version history]]</translate>
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | 1.6.6
|-
| style="background-color:#f4cccc; font-weight:bold;" | 1.5
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | [[File:X-mark.png|center]]
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | [[File:X-mark.png|center]]
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | [[File:X-mark.png|center]]
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | <translate>
Sept 2012</translate>
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | <translate>
Migration to 3.x</translate>
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | <translate>
Plan to migrate to {{CurrentSTSVer|maintenance}} now [[Joomla 1.5 version history]]</translate>
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | <translate>
EOL at 1.5.26</translate>
|-
| style="background-color:#f4cccc; font-weight:bold;" | 1.0
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | [[File:X-mark.png|center]]
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | [[File:X-mark.png|center]]
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | [[File:X-mark.png|center]]
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | <translate>
22 July 2009</translate>
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | <translate>
Migration to 3.x</translate>
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | <translate>
Plan to migrate to {{CurrentSTSVer|maintenance}} now</translate>
| style="background-color:#f4cccc;" | <translate>
EOL at 1.0.15</translate>
|}
<noinclude>
<references />
<translate>
[[Category:Joomla! versions]]</translate>
</noinclude>

Help5.x:Plugins

2023-09-03T22:08:19Z

Heelc29: Help screen 5.0

<noinclude><languages /></noinclude>
<translate>

==Description== 
The Plugin Manager allows you to enable and disable Joomla! plugins and to edit a plugin's details and options. It is also useful for quickly enabling/disabling multiple plugins at once.

==How to Access== 
* Select {{rarr|System,Manage panel,Plugins}} from the Administrator menu. or...
* Select {{rarr|Home Dashboard,Site panel,Plugins}} from the Administrator menu.

==Screenshot== 
[[Image:Help-4x-Extensions-Plugin-Manager-screen-en.png|800px]]

==Column Headers== 
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Checkbox/en}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Ordering/en}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Enabled module/en}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Plugin_Name/en}}
* '''Type.''' The Type of the plug-in. Some possible types are: authentication, content, editors, editors-xtd, search, system, and user. These are also the names of the website sub-directories where the plugin files are located. For example, plugins with a type of 'authentication' are located in the website directory 'plugins/authentication'.
* '''Element.''' The plug-in directory name which contains the plugin's files. This directory will be located in the directory which corresponds to its type. For example, the 'Authentication - Joomla' plugin is of type 'Authentication' and element 'joomla'. So the website directory it is located in is 'plugins/authentication/joomla'
* '''Access.''' Which user 'access levels' have access to this item. You can change an item's Access Level by clicking on its name to open it up for editing. The default user 'access levels' which come preconfigured with Joomla! are:
** Public: Everyone has access including website visitors who have not logged in
** Registered: Only users with registered status or higher will have access
** Special: Only users with author status or higher have access
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Id/en}}

==List Filters== 
'''Search bar'''. Near the top of the page you will see the search bar shown in the [[#screenshot|Screenshot]] above.
*'''Search by Text'''. Enter part of the search term and click the Search icon. ''Hover'' to see a ''Tooltip'' indicating which fields will be searched.{{-}}To 'Search by ID' enter "id:x", where "x" is the ID number (for example, "id:19").
*'''Filter Options'''. Click to display the additional filters.
*'''Clear'''. Click to clear the Filter field and restore the list to its unfiltered state.
*'''Ordering'''. Shows the current list ordering field. 2 ways to change the order:
**Select from the dropdown list. Ordering may be in ascending or descending order.
**Click a column heading. The column heading toggles between ascending and descending order.
*'''Number to Display'''. Shows the number of items in a list. Select from the dropdown list to change the number displayed.{{-}}The default for a site is '20' but this may be changed in the [[S:MyLanguage/Help4.x:Site_Global_Configuration{{#translation:}}#defaultlistlimit|Global Configuration]].
The list of plugins which appears on this screen may be very large. You can use one of the available filters or any combination of them to limit the number of plug-ins displayed to just the plug-ins which match your filter parameters.


'''Filter Options'''
* '''Select Status.''' Select a status (Enabled or Disabled) from the drop-down list box to show only plugins with the selected status.
* '''Select Type.''' Select a Type from the drop-down list box to show only plugins of the selected Type.
* '''Select Element.''' A long list of elements, allowing a precise selection.
* '''Select Access.''' Select the 'Access Level' from the drop-down list box to only show plugins accessible by uses of the selected 'Access Level'

==Toolbar== 

At the top of the page you will see the toolbar shown in the [[#Screenshot|Screenshot]] above. The functions are:
*'''Enable'''. Makes the selected item available for use on your website. You may also toggle between Enabled and Disabled by clicking on the icon in the 'Status' column.
*'''Disable'''. Makes the selected plugins unavailable for use on your website. You may also toggle between Enabled and Disabled by clicking on the icon in the 'Status' column.
*'''Check-In'''. Checks-in the selected plugins. Works with one or multiple plugins selected.
*'''Options.''' Opens the Options window where settings such as default parameters can be edited.
*'''Help'''. Opens this help screen.

==Quick Tips== 
*To enable or disable a group of Plugins, check the check box for each desired Plugin and then click the Enable or Disable toolbar button.
*You may see the terms 'options' and 'parameters' used interchangeably in help documentation and tutorials you encounter.

</translate>
<noinclude>
{{Cathelp|5.0|Plugin Manager Help Screens|Extensions Help Screens}}
</noinclude>

Help5.x:Private Messages: Write

2023-09-03T22:07:46Z

Heelc29: Help screen 5.0

<noinclude><languages /></noinclude>
<translate>

==Description== 
This screen lets you write and send private messages to others with the correct [[Help40:Users:_Groups/en|User Group]] permissions.

==How to Access== 
* Select {{rarr|Users,Messaging,Private Messages,+}} from the Administrator menu.
* Select {{rarr|Users,Messaging,Private Messages}} and click the "New" icon in the Private Messages screen.

==Screenshot== 
[[Image:Help-4x-Components-Messaging-Write-screen-en.png|800px]]

==Details== 
*'''Recipient.''' The recipient of the message. Click on the "Select User" button to open the pop-up, and then, from the list of names, select the user to whom you wish to send the message.
*'''Subject.''' The subject of the message. Just like the subject of an email, it helps if this is a short description of the message body.
*'''Message.''' The body text of the message. Just like the body text of an email, it helps if the message is meaningful and kept relatively short.

==Toolbar== 
At the top of the page you will see the toolbar shown in the [[#Screenshot|Screenshot]] above. The functions are:
*'''Send:''' Sends the message. Note that the Recipient, Subject and Message fields cannot be blank.
*'''Cancel'''. Closes the current screen and returns to the previous screen without saving any modifications you may have made.
*'''Help'''. Opens this help screen.

</translate>
<noinclude>
{{Cathelp|5.0|Components Help Screens}}
</noinclude>

Help5.x:Private Messages

2023-09-03T22:06:33Z

Heelc29: Help screen 5.0

<noinclude><languages /></noinclude>
<translate>

==Description== 
The Private Messaging screen allows you to send messages to other Back-end Joomla! users who have permission to send and receive messages. You may read, write, send, and delete messages here. In addition, you may also manage message settings and grouping options.

==How to Access== 
*Select {{rarr|Users,Messaging,Private Messages}} from the Administrator menu.

==Screenshot== 
[[Image:Help-4x-Components-Messaging-Inbox-screen-en.png|800px]]

==Column Headers== 
*'''Checkbox.''' The item selection checkbox. Check this box to select one or more items. To select all items, check the box in the column heading. After one or more boxes are checked, click a toolbar button to take an action on the selected item or items. Many toolbar actions, such as Mark As Read, Mark As Unread and Trash, can work with multiple items.
*'''Subject.''' The subject line of the message. Click this to open the message for viewing. This takes you to the [[Help40:Private_Messages:_Read/en|View Message]] screen where you view, reply to, or delete the message.
*'''Read.''' A green tick indicates that the message has been read. A red donut indicates that it has not been read.
*'''From.''' The user who sent the message.
*'''Date.''' The date and time the message was sent.

==List Filters== 
'''Search bar'''. Near the top of the page you will see the search bar shown in the [[#screenshot|Screenshot]] above.
*'''Search by Text'''. Enter part of the search term and click the Search icon. ''Hover'' to see a ''Tooltip'' indicating which fields will be searched.{{-}}To 'Search by ID' enter "id:x", where "x" is the ID number (for example, "id:19").
*'''Filter Options'''. Click to display the additional filters.
*'''Clear'''. Click to clear the Filter field and restore the list to its unfiltered state.
*'''Ordering'''. Shows the current list ordering field. 2 ways to change the order:
**Select from the dropdown list. Ordering may be in ascending or descending order.
**Click a column heading. The column heading toggles between ascending and descending order.
*'''Number to Display'''. Shows the number of items in a list. Select from the dropdown list to change the number displayed.{{-}}The default for a site is '20' but this may be changed in the [[Help4.x:Site_Global_Configuration/en#defaultlistlimit|Global Configuration]].
'''Filter Options'''
*'''Select State.''' Use the drop-down list box to select: Read, Unread or Trashed. Only messages with this state will show on the list.

==Toolbar== 
At the top of the page you will see the toolbar shown in the [[#Screenshot|Screenshot]] above. The functions are:
*'''New'''. Opens the editing screen to create a new message.
*'''Actions:''' Reveals a list of actions for selected Items. Check one or more Item checkboxes to activate the list.
**'''Mark As Read'''. Marks the selected messages as Read. Select messages by checking the message's checkbox.
**'''Mark As Unread'''. Marks the selected messages as Unread. Select messages by checking the message's checkbox.
*'''Trash'''. Changes the status of the selected items to indicate that they are trashed.{{-}}Trashed items can still be recovered by selecting 'Trashed' in the 'Select Status' filter and changing the status of the articles to Published or Unpublished as preferred.{{-}}To permanently delete trashed items, select 'Trashed' in the 'Select Status' filter, select the items to be permanently deleted, then click the 'Empty Trash' toolbar icon.
*'''My Settings'''. Opens a new window that allows you to change messaging settings.
[[Image:Help-4x-Components-Messaging-My-Settings-screen-en.png|400px]]
*'''Options.''' Opens the Options window where settings such as default parameters can be edited.
*'''Help'''. Opens this help screen.

==Quick Tips== 
*Only users who are members of the "Super Users" and "Administrator" groups have access to this screen, unless User Group permissions have been altered for this component via Options on the toolbar.
*You are able to restore Messages previously sent to the Trash by finding the Select State filter drop-down and selecting "Trash" from the list. Finally, to restore the message, simply select the messages you want to restore using the checkbox next to the particular message you require and click the "Mark As Unread" button in the toolbar.

</translate>
<noinclude>
{{Cathelp|5.0|Components Help Screens}}
</noinclude>

Help5.x:Templates: Edit Style

2023-09-03T22:06:08Z

Heelc29: Help screen 5.0

<noinclude><languages /></noinclude>
<translate>

==Description== 
This is where you edit template styles. When a template is first installed, a default style is created for it. The default style for the template will have the same name as the template with a ''- Default'' suffix. To make a different variation of the default template style, check the default style's checkbox and press the ''Duplicate'' icon in the toolbar. Then edit the duplicate.

==How to Access== 
*Select {{rarr|System,Templates Panel,Site Templates Styles}} from the Administrator menu. Or...
*Select {{rarr|System,Templates Panel,Administrator Templates Styles}} from the Administrator menu. Then...
**Select the name of the Template Style to edit in the Style column.

==Screenshot== 
[[Image:Help-4x-Extensions-Template-Manager-Styles-Edit-screen-en.png|800px]]

==Form Fields== 
*'''Style Name.''' The name of the style. This is the name that will display in the Style column of the ''Template: Styles'' screen.

===Details Tab=== 
*'''Template Name.''' The name of the template, Site or Administrator indicator and a brief description.
*'''Default.''' Whether or not the style is the default for the location.
*'''Template.''' The name of the template the style is derived from.

===Advanced Tab=== 
This section may not be present for all styles. If a template from which a style is derived from has configurable options they will be present here. It is these additional configurable options which allow you to have multiple different styles of templates with variations of these options. The options available will vary based on what options the template developer made available.

===Atum Colour Settings=== 
The default Administrator template allows you to experiment with colour variations. Save and see!

===Atum Image Settings=== 
You may select an image to replace the '''Login Logo''' in the Administrator login form, and the '''Brand Logo''' in the Administrator Title bar in expanded mode and in compacted mode. The defaults are the Joomla Brand logos. In the Title Bar, the word Joomla! is present in the '''Brand Large''' version and omitted in the '''Brand Small''' version. Select '''Toggle Menu''' to see the change.


If you provide your own Brand Small you also need to provide a width style override. To do so, create a user.css file in the template root and insert the following, but replace 3rem with a suitable width for your image:


.header .logo.small {
width: 3rem;
}

===Menu Assignment Tab=== 
This section contains all the menu items configured in your Joomla! website. To apply the current style to a menu item's corresponding web page, check the box next to the menu item. You can press the ''Toggle Selection'' button to invert the menu item selections.


'''Note''': If a checkbox is grayed out and cannot be checked then it could be because the menu item is in use by another user. You can see if this is the case by going to the [[Help40:Menus:_Items/en|menu manager screen for the menu]] concerned. If there is a padlock symbol next to the menu item then it is currently in use by another user.

==Toolbar== 
At the top of the page you will see the toolbar shown in the [[#Screenshot|Screenshot]] above. The functions are:
*'''Save'''. Saves the item and stays in the current screen.
*'''Save & Close'''. Saves the item and closes the current screen.
*'''Save as Copy'''. Saves your changes to a copy of the current item. Does not affect the current item. This toolbar icon is not shown if you are creating a new item.
*'''Cancel'''. Closes the current screen and returns to the previous screen without saving any modifications you may have made.
*'''Help'''. Opens this help screen.

</translate>
<noinclude>
{{Cathelp|5.0|Template Manager Help Screens|Styles Help Screens}}
</noinclude>

Help4.x:Banners: Tracks

2023-09-03T22:03:56Z

Heelc29: Help screen 4.4

<noinclude><languages /></noinclude>
<translate>

==Description== 
</translate>
<translate>

Used to view a list of existing Banner Tracking information.</translate>
<translate>

==How to Access== 
</translate>
<translate>

* Select {{rarr|Components,Banners,Tracks}} </translate>
<translate>

==Screenshot== 
</translate>
[[Image:Help-4x-Components-Banners-Tracks-screen-<translate>
en</translate>.png|800px]]
<translate>

==Column Headers== 
</translate>
<translate>

Click on a column heading to sort the list by that column's value.</translate>
<translate>

*'''Name.''' The name and category of the banner. </translate>
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Client/<translate>

en</translate>}}
<translate>

*'''Type.''' The type of the track. This is an impression or a click. </translate>
<translate>

*'''Count.''' Number of impressions or clicks.</translate>
<translate>

*'''Date.''' Date and hour of the impression or click.</translate>
<translate>
==List Filters== 
</translate>
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_filter_bar_top_descriptor/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{Chunk4x:Help screen filters Search Bar Filter/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Select Category/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Select Client/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Select Track Type/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Select Max Levels/<translate>

en</translate>}}
<translate>

'''Begin and End date.'''</translate>
<translate>

*'''Begin date.''' The startingdate of the tracks to list. </translate>
<translate>

*'''End date.''' The enddate of the tracks to list. </translate>
{{:Chunk4x:Help_screen_filters_Pagination/<translate>

en</translate>}}
<translate>

==Toolbar== 
</translate>
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_top_descriptor/<translate>

en</translate>}}
<translate>

*'''Export'''. Opens a window where you will be able export the Banner Tracks.</translate>
<translate>

*'''Delete Tracks'''. Will delete the selected Banner Tracks.</translate>
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Options/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Help/<translate>

en</translate>}}
<translate>
See [[Help40:Articles:_Options/en|Article Manager Options]] for more information.</translate>
<translate>

==Quick Tips== 
</translate>
<translate>

* You must add at least one Banner Client and Banner Category ''before'' you can add a Banner.</translate>
<translate>

==Related Information== 
</translate>
<translate>

* To create or edit Banners: [[Help40:Banners:_Edit/en|Banner - New/Edit]]</translate>
<translate>

* To work with Banner Clients: [[Help40:Banners:_Clients/en|Banner Client Manager]]</translate>
<translate>

* To work with Banner Categories: [[Help40:Banners:_Categories/en|Banner Category Manager]]</translate>

{{Cathelp|4.0,4.1,4.2,4.3,4.4|Banner Manager Help Screens|Components Help Screens}}

Help4.x:Banners: New or Edit Client

2023-09-03T22:03:41Z

Heelc29: Help screen 4.4

<noinclude><languages /></noinclude>
<translate>

==Description== 
</translate>
<translate>

This is where you add a new Banner Client or edit an existing one. Note that you need to create at least one Banner Client before you can create a Banner.</translate>
<translate>

==How to Access== 
</translate>
<translate>

* Select {{rarr|Components,Banners,Clients}} in the Administrator menu.
** To create a new Client click the New button in the Toolbar.
** To edit an existing Client click the name in the Client column.</translate>
<translate>

==Screenshot== 
</translate>
[[Image:Help-4x-Components-Banners-Clients-Edit-screen-<translate>
en</translate>.png|800px]]
<translate>

==Form Fields== 
</translate>
<translate>

*'''Name.''' The name of this client.</translate>
<translate>

===Details Tab=== 
</translate>
<translate>

*'''Contact Name.''' The name of the contact person for this client.</translate>
<translate>

*'''Contact E-mail.''' The e-mail address of the banner client.</translate>
<translate>

*'''Purchase Type.''' The purchase type of the banner. This is used to indicate how the banner client purchased the display time for the banner - monthly, yearly, etc...</translate>
<translate>

*'''Track Impressions.''' Whether or not to track the number of times the banner is displayed to web site visitors.</translate>
<translate>

*'''Track Clicks.''' Whether or not to track the number of times the banner is clicked by web site visitors.</translate>
<translate>

*'''Additional Information.''' Enter any extra information you want to save for this client.</translate>
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header State/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Version Note/<translate>

en</translate>}}
<translate>

===Metadata Tab=== 
</translate>
[[Image:Help-4x-Components-Banners-Clients-Edit-screen-metadata-<translate>
en</translate>.png]]
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Metadata Keywords/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Use Own Prefix/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Meta Keyword Prefix/<translate>

en</translate>}}
<translate>

==Toolbar== 
</translate>
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_top_descriptor/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Save/<translate>
en</translate>|<translate>
client</translate>}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_SaveAndClose/<translate>
en</translate>|<translate>
client</translate>}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_SaveAndNew/<translate>
en</translate>|<translate>
client</translate>}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_SaveAsCopy/<translate>
en</translate>|<translate>
client</translate>}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Cancel/<translate>

en</translate>}} <translate>

Or</translate>
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Close/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Versions/<translate>
en</translate>|<translate>
client</translate>}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Help/<translate>

en</translate>}}
<translate>

==Related Information== 
</translate>
<translate>

* To create or edit Banners: [[Help40:Banners:_Edit/en|Banner - New/Edit]]</translate>
<translate>

* To work with Banner Categories: [[Help40:Banners:_Categories/en|Banner Category Manager]]</translate>
<translate>

* To place Banners on Pages: [[Help40:Modules/en|Module Manager]]</translate>

{{Cathelp|4.0,4.1,4.2,4.3,4.4|Banner Manager Help Screens|Components Help Screens}}

Help4.x:Banners: New or Edit Category

2023-09-03T22:02:38Z

Heelc29: Help screen 4.4

<noinclude><languages /></noinclude>
<translate>

==Description== 
</translate>
<translate>

This is where you can add a new Banner Category or edit an existing one. Note that you need to create at least one Banner Category before you can create a Banner. Also, Banner Categories are separate from other types of Categories, such as those for Articles, Contacts, and News Feeds.</translate>
<translate>

==How to Access== 
</translate>
<translate>

Navigate to the [[Help40:Banners:_Categories/en|Banner Category Manager]], {{rarr|Components,Banners,Categories}}</translate>
<translate>

* '''New'''. Click on '''New''' icon in toolbar.</translate>
<translate>

* '''Edit'''. To edit an existing Banner Category, click on the '''Category's Name''' in the table of categories.</translate>
<translate>

==Screenshot== 
</translate>
[[Image:Help-4x-Components-Banners-Categories-Edit-screen-<translate>
en</translate>.png|800px]]
<translate>

==Form Fields== 
</translate>
{{Chunk4x:Colheader Enter Title/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{Chunk4x:Help_screen_column_header_Alias/<translate>

en</translate>}}
<translate>

===Details Tab=== 
</translate>
<translate>

'''Left panel'''</translate>
{{Chunk4x:colheader|Description/<translate> en</translate>}}
<translate>

'''Right Panel'''
</translate>
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Parent/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Enter Status/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Enter Access/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Enter Language/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Enter Tags/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Note/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Version Note/<translate>

en</translate>}}
<translate>

==Options Tab== 
</translate>
<translate>

*'''Layout.''' Select a layout from the list.</translate>
<translate>

*'''Image.''' Optional: Select an image to display alongside this Category.</translate>
<translate>

*'''Alt Text.''' Alternative text for the icon - often used by screen readers.</translate>
<translate>

==Publishing Tab== 
</translate>
[[File:Help-4x-Banners-Categories-Edit-screen-publish-options-tab-<translate>

en</translate>.png|600px]]
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Add Category Publishing Options/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Add Banners Category Permissions/<translate>

en</translate>}}
<translate>

==Toolbar== 
</translate>
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_top_descriptor/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Save/<translate>
en</translate>|<translate>
category</translate>}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_SaveAndClose/<translate>
en</translate>|<translate>
category</translate>}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_SaveAndNew/<translate>
en</translate>}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_SaveAsCopy/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Cancel/<translate>

en</translate>}} <translate>

Or</translate>
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Close/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Versions/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Associations/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Help/<translate>

en</translate>}}
<translate>

==Related Information== 
</translate>
<translate>

* To create or edit Banners: [[Help40:Banners:_Categories/en|Banner Category Manager - New/Edit]]</translate>
<translate>

* To work with Banner Clients: [[Help40:Banners:_Clients/en|Banner Client Manager]]</translate>
<translate>

* To place Banners on Pages: [[Help40:Modules/en|Module Manager]]</translate>

{{Cathelp|4.0,4.1,4.2,4.3,4.4|Banner Manager Help Screens|Components Help Screens}}

Help4.x:Banners: Edit

2023-09-03T22:02:08Z

Heelc29: Help screen 4.4

<noinclude><languages /></noinclude>
<translate>

==Description== 
</translate>
<translate>

Used to add or edit banners which can be displayed on your Joomla! website. Remember to create at least one </translate>[[Help40:Banners:_Clients/<translate> en</translate>|<translate> Banner Client</translate>]] <translate> and one </translate>[[Help40:Banners:_Categories/<translate> en</translate>|<translate> Banner Category</translate>]] <translate> before creating any Banners.</translate>
<translate>

==How to Access== 
</translate>
<translate>

To ''''add'''' a new Banner or ''''edit'''' an existing Banner, navigate to the</translate> [[Help40:Banners/<translate> en</translate>|<translate> Banner Manager</translate>]]:
<translate>

* Select {{rarr|Components,Banners,New}} to create a new Banner.</translate>
<translate>

* Select {{rarr|Components,Banners}} and click on a Banner name to ''''Edit'''' an existing Banner.</translate>
<translate>

==Screenshot== 
</translate>
<translate>

A banner may be a clickable image or some custom code. The Image Type is shown in the screenshot below. The custom type has the image selection box replaced with a code text area.</translate>

[[Image:Help-4x-Components-Banners-Banners-Edit-screen-<translate>
en</translate>.png|800px]]
<translate>

==Form Fields== 
</translate>
<translate>

*'''Name.''' The name of the Banner. This is the name that will display in the ''Name'' column of the </translate>[[Help40:Banners/<translate> en</translate>|<translate> Banner Manager</translate>]].
{{Chunk4x:colheader|Alias/<translate> en</translate>}}
<translate>

===Details Tab=== 
</translate>
<translate>

'''Left Panel'''</translate>
{{Chunk4x:Help screen column header Detail Tab Banner Edit/<translate>
en</translate>}}
<translate>

'''Right Panel'''</translate>
{{Chunk4x:colheader|Status/<translate> en</translate>}}
{{Chunk4x:colheader|Sticky/<translate>
en</translate>}}
{{Chunk4x:colheader|Language/<translate>
en</translate>}}
{{Chunk4x:colheader|Version Note/<translate>
en</translate>}}
<translate>

===Banner Details Tab=== 
</translate>
:[[Image:Help-4x-Components-Banners-Banners-Edit-Banners-Details-Tab-<translate>
en</translate>.png|800px]]
{{Chunk4x:Help screen column header Banners Details Tab/<translate>
en</translate>}}
<translate>

===Publishing Tab=== 
</translate>
[[Image:Help-4x-Components-Banners-Banners-Edit-Publishing-Options-Tab-<translate>
en</translate>.png|800px]]
{{Chunk4x:colheader|PublishStartBanner/<translate>
en</translate>}}
{{Chunk4x:colheader|PublishFinishBanner/<translate>
en</translate>}}
{{Chunk4x:colheader|Created Date/<translate>
en</translate>}}
{{Chunk4x:colheader|Enter Created By/<translate>
en</translate>}}
{{Chunk4x:colheader|Enter Created By Alias/<translate>
en</translate>}}
{{Chunk4x:colheader|Modified Date/<translate>
en</translate>}}
{{Chunk4x:colheader|Modified By/<translate>
en</translate>}}
{{Chunk4x:colheader|Revision/<translate>
en</translate>}}
{{Chunk4x:colheader|Metadata Keywords/<translate>
en</translate>}}
{{Chunk4x:colheader|Use Own Prefix/<translate>
en</translate>}}
{{Chunk4x:colheader|Meta Keyword Prefix/<translate>
en</translate>}}
<translate>

==Toolbar== 
</translate>
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_top_descriptor/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Save/<translate> en</translate>|<translate> banner</translate>}}
{{Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_SaveAndClose/<translate> en</translate>|<translate> banner</translate>}}
{{Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_SaveAndNew/<translate> en</translate>|<translate> banner</translate>}}
{{Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_SaveAsCopy/<translate> en</translate>|<translate> banner</translate>}}
{{Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Cancel/<translate> en</translate>|<translate> banner</translate>}} <translate>

Or</translate>
{{Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Close/<translate> en</translate>|<translate> banner</translate>}}
{{Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Versions/<translate> en</translate>|<translate> banner</translate>}}
{{Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Help/<translate> en</translate>|<translate> banner</translate>}}
<translate>

==Quick Tips== 
</translate>
<translate>

* Banners are placed on specific pages by adding Modules of type 'Banners' using the</translate> [[Help40:Modules/<translate> en</translate>|<translate> Module Manager</translate>]].
<translate>

* If you have a series of Banners that you would like to display on one or more pages in random order:</translate>
<translate>

*# Create the Banners you wish to include, making sure they have the same Client and Category.</translate>
<translate>

*# Create a Banner Module for this Client and Category, and in the Menu Assignment pick the Menu Selections for the module to display on.</translate>
<translate>

*# In the Banner Module, set the 'Randomise' value to 'Sticky, Randomise'.</translate>
<translate>

: With these settings, the different Banners for that Client and Category will display on the selected pages in random order.</translate>

<translate>
==Related Information== 
</translate>
<translate>

'''More Component Banner Help:'''</translate>

{| class="wikitable"
|-
! <translate>
Related Help Screens</translate> !! <translate>
Description</translate>
|-
| [[Help40:Banners/<translate> en</translate>|<translate>
Banners</translate>]] || <translate>
Used to view a list of existing Banners, edit current and create new Banners. There must be at least one Banner Client and Banner Category before a Banner can be created.</translate>
|-
| [[Help40:Banners:_Options/<translate> en</translate>|<translate>
Banners: Options</translate>]] || <translate>
Global options (configuration) for Banner Clients.</translate>
|-
| [[Help40:Banners:_Categories/<translate> en</translate>|<translate>
Banners: Categories</translate>]] || <translate>
Used to view a list of existing Banner Categories, edit current and create new Banner Categories. Note that Banner Categories are separate from other Categories, such as for Articles, Contacts, News Feeds, and Web Links. There must be at least one Banner Client and Banner Category before a Banner can be created.</translate>
|-
| [[Help40:Banners:_New_or_Edit_Category/<translate> en</translate>|<translate>
Banners: New or Edit Category</translate>]] || <translate>
This is where you can add a new Banner Category or edit an existing one. Note that you need to create at least one Banner Category before you can create a Banner. Also, Banner Categories are separate from other types of Categories, such as those for Articles, Contacts, and News Feeds.</translate>
|-
| [[Help40:Banners:_Clients/<translate> en</translate>|<translate>
Banners: Clients</translate>]] || <translate>
The Banner Client Manager is where you can edit existing Banner Clients or create new ones. Note that you must have at least one Banner Client and one Banner Category defined before you can add your first Banner.</translate>
|-
| [[Help40:Banners:_New_or_Edit_Client/<translate> en</translate>|<translate>
Banners: New or Edit Client</translate>]] || <translate>
This is where you add a new Banner Client or edit an existing one. Note that you need to create at least one Banner Client before you can create a Banner.</translate>
|-
| [[Help40:Banners:_Tracks/<translate> en</translate>|<translate>
Banners Tracks</translate>]] || <translate>
Used to view a list of existing Banner Tracking information.</translate>
|}

<translate>

'''To place Banners on Pages:'''</translate>

{| class="wikitable"
|-
! <translate>
Related Help Screens</translate> !! <translate>
Description</translate>
|-
| [[Help40:Site_Modules:_Banners/<translate> en</translate>|<translate>
Modules Banners</translate>]] || <translate>
The Banner Module displays the active Banners from the Component.</translate>
|}

{{Cathelp|4.0,4.1,4.2,4.3,4.4|Banner Manager Help Screens|Components Help Screens}}

Help4.x:Banners: Clients

2023-09-03T22:01:37Z

Heelc29: Help screen 4.4

<noinclude><languages /></noinclude>
<translate>

==Description== 
</translate>
<translate>

The Banner Client Manager is where you can edit existing Banner Clients or create new ones. Note that you must have at least one Banner Client and one Banner Category defined before you can add your first Banner.</translate>

<translate>
==How to Access== 
</translate>
<translate>

* Select '''Components → Banners → Clients''' from the drop-down menu of the '''''Joomla! Administrator Panel'''''. You can also select the 'Clients' menu link from the [[Help40:Banners:_Categories/en|Banner Categories Manager]], [[Help40:Banners:_Edit/en|Banner Manager]] or the [[Help40:Banners:_Tracks/en|Banner Tracks Manager]].</translate>

<translate>
==Screenshot== 
</translate>
[[Image:Help-4x-components-banner-manager-clients-<translate>
en</translate>.png|800px]]

<translate>
==Column Headers== 
</translate>
<translate>

Click on the column heading to sort the list by that column's value.</translate>
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Checkbox/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Status/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Client/<translate>

en</translate>}}
<translate>

*'''Contact.''' The Contact for this Client.</translate>
{{Chunk4x:Help screen column header Published/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{Chunk4x:Help screen column header Unpublished/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Archived/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Trashed/<translate>

en</translate>}}
<translate>

*'''Purchase Type.''' The banner purchase type of the client. This is used to indicate how the client purchased the display time for their banners - monthly, yearly, etc...</translate>
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Id/<translate>

en</translate>}}

<translate>
==List Filters== 
</translate>
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_filters_Search_Bar_Filter/<translate>

en</translate>}}

<translate>
===Filter Options=== 
</translate>
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_filter_bar_top_descriptor/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Select Status/<translate>

en</translate>}}
<translate>

'''Filter by Purchase Type'''</translate>
:[[File:Help35-colheader-select-type-<translate>
en</translate>.png]]
<translate>

*'''Select Type.''' Select the Purchase Type from the drop-down list box of available Purchase Types.</translate>
<translate>

===Pagination=== 
</translate>
{{Chunk4x:Help_screen_filters_Pagination/<translate>

en</translate>}}
<translate>

==Toolbar== 
</translate>
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_top_descriptor/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_New/<translate>
en</translate>|<translate>
client</translate>}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Actions/<translate>

en</translate>|client}}
<ul>
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Publish/<translate>
en</translate>|<translate>
client</translate>}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Unpublish/<translate>
en</translate>|<translate>
client</translate>}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Archive/<translate>
en</translate>|<translate>
client</translate>}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Checkin/<translate>
en</translate>|<translate>
client</translate>}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Trash/<translate>
en</translate>|<translate>
client</translate>}}
</ul>
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Help/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Options/<translate>

en</translate>}}
<translate>

==Options== 
</translate>
<translate>

See [[:Help4.x:Banners:_Options/en|Banners: Options]].</translate>
<translate>

==Related Information== 
</translate>
<translate>

* To create or edit Banners: [[Help40:Banners:_Edit/en|Banner - New/Edit]]</translate>
<translate>

* To work with Banner Categories: [[Help40:Banners:_Categories/en|Banner Category Manager]]</translate>

{{Cathelp|4.0,4.1,4.2,4.3,4.4|Banner Manager Help Screens|Components Help Screens}}

Help4.x:Banners: Categories

2023-09-03T22:01:13Z

Heelc29: Help screen 4.4

<noinclude><languages /></noinclude>
<translate>

==Description== 
</translate>
<translate>

Used to view a list of existing Banner Categories, edit current and create new Banner Categories. Note that Banner Categories are separate from other Categories, such as for Articles, Contacts, News Feeds, and Web Links. There must be at least one Banner Client and Banner Category '''before''' a Banner can be created.</translate>
<translate>

==How to Access== 
</translate>
<translate>

* Select {{rarr|Components,Banners,Categories}}</translate>
<translate>

==Screenshot== 
</translate>
[[Image:Help-4x-Components-Banners-Categories-screen-<translate>
en</translate>.png|800px]]
<translate>

==Column Headers== 
</translate>
<translate>

Click on the column heading to sort the list by that column's value.</translate>
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_column_header_Checkbox/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_column_header_Ordering/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_column_header_Status/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_column_header_Title/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_column_header_Hits/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_column_header_Access/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_column_header_Language/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_column_header_Id/<translate>

en</translate>}}
<translate>

==List Filters== 
</translate>
{{Chunk4x:Help_screen_filters_Search_Bar_Filter/<translate>

en</translate>}}
<translate>

===Filter Options=== 
</translate>
{{Chunk4x:Help_screen_filters_Status/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{Chunk4x:Help_screen_filters_Access_Level/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{Chunk4x:Help_screen_filters_Language/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{Chunk4x:Help_screen_filters_Tags/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{Chunk4x:Help_screen_filters_Max_Levels/<translate>

en</translate>}}
<translate>

===Number of Items to Display=== 
</translate>
{{Chunk4x:Help_screen_filters_Pagination/<translate>

en</translate>}}
<translate>

==Toolbar== 
</translate>
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_top_descriptor/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_New/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Actions/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Rebuild/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Options/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Help/<translate>

en</translate>}}
<translate>

==Batch Process== 
</translate>
<translate>

The Batch Process allows a change in settings for a group of selected items marked with a check-mark in the corresponding check-mark boxes. To use: click on the link found below the table of items being viewed to activate the drop down field area. Using the 'Batch' Toolbar button will open a pop up window as shown below.</translate>

:[[Image:Help-4x-colheader-batch-process-categories-<translate> en</translate>.png]]

<translate>

You can change one value or all three values at one time. </translate>
<translate> :'''''Note''' - if you copy items to a new category, changes you have selected from access level and language will be applied to the copies, not the original.''</translate>
<translate>

'''How to Batch Process''' a group of items:</translate>
<translate> * Select one or more items on the list by checking the desired category check boxes.</translate>
<translate> * Click the 'Batch' Toolbar button.</translate>
<translate> * Set one or more of the following values:</translate>
<translate> ** To change the '''Access Levels''', select the desired new access level from the Set Access Level list box.</translate>
<translate> ** To change the '''Language''', select the desired language from the Set Language list box.</translate>
<translate> ** To change the '''Category''', select a category. To leave the category unchanged, use the default value of "Select". </translate>
<translate> *** To copy the items to a different category, select the desired category from the category list box and check the Copy option. In this case, the original items are unchanged and the copies are assigned to the new category and, if selected, the new access level and language.</translate>
<translate> *** To move the items to a different category, select the desired category from the category list box and check the Move option. In this case, the original items will be moved to a new category and, if selected, be assigned the new access level and language.</translate>
<translate> * When all of the settings are entered, click on Process to perform the changes. A message '''"Batch process completed successfully."''' will show.</translate>
<translate> Note that nothing will happen if you (a) don't have any items selected or (b) have not selected an access level, language, or category. </translate>
<translate>

If you wish to clear your entered selections, click on the Cancel button. This will return all of the Batch controls to their default values. Note that this does ''not'' uncheck the check boxes for the items.</translate>
<translate>

==Quick Tips== 
</translate>
<translate>

* You must add at least one Banner Client and Banner Category ''before'' you can add a Banner.</translate>

<translate>
==Related Information== 
</translate>
<translate>

* To create or edit Banners: [[Help40:Banners:_Edit/en|Banner - New/Edit]]</translate>
<translate>

* To work with Banner Clients: [[Help40:Banners:_Clients/en|Banner Client Manager]]</translate>

{{Cathelp|4.0,4.1,4.2,4.3,4.4|Banner Manager Help Screens|Components Help Screens}}

Help4.x:Banners

2023-09-03T22:00:53Z

Heelc29: Help screen 4.4

<noinclude><languages /></noinclude>
<translate>

==Description== 
</translate>
<translate>

Banners are blocks of content containing advertising information. Each banner has a Client, the person paying for the information, and a Track record, the number of times the banner has been selected. A site may have several banners in different locations.</translate>
<translate>

The Banners screen shows a list of existing Banners with links to edit current and create new Banners. There must be at least one Banner Client and one Banner Category '''before''' a Banner can be created.</translate>
<translate>

==How to Access== 
</translate>
<translate>

* Select {{rarr|Components,Banners,Banners}} from the Administrator menu. </translate>
<translate>

* Or Select a numbered button in the</translate> [[Help40:Banners:_Categories/<translate> en</translate>|<translate>
Banner Categories Manager</translate>]] or the [[Help40:Banners:_Clients/<translate> en</translate>|<translate>
Banner Clients Manager</translate>]]<translate> 
pages.</translate>
<translate>

==Screenshot== 
</translate>
[[Image:Help-4x-components-banner-manager-banners-<translate>
en</translate>.png|800px]]
<translate>

==Column Headers== 
</translate>
<translate>

In the table containing Banners the different columns are listed below. Click on the column heading on the banner manager screen to sort the list by that column's value.</translate>
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Checkbox/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Ordering/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Status/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Banner Name/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Sticky/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Client/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Impressions/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Clicks/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Language/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Id/<translate>

en</translate>}}
<translate>

==List Filters== 
</translate>
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_filters_Search_Bar_Filter/<translate>

en</translate>}}
<translate>

'''Filter Options'''</translate>
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_filter_bar_top_descriptor/<translate>

en</translate>}}
<translate>
</translate>
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Select Status/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Select Category/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Select Client/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Select Language/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Select Max Levels/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{Chunk4x:Help_screen_filters_Pagination/<translate>

en</translate>}}
<translate>

==Toolbar== 
</translate>
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_top_descriptor/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_New/<translate>
en</translate>|<translate>
banner</translate>}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Actions/<translate>
en</translate>|<translate>

banner</translate>}}
<ul>
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Publish/<translate>
en</translate>|<translate>
banner</translate>}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Unpublish/<translate>
en</translate>|<translate>
banner</translate>}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Archive/<translate>
en</translate>|<translate>
banner</translate>}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Checkin/<translate>
en</translate>|<translate>
banner</translate>}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Trash/<translate>
en</translate>|<translate>
banner</translate>}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Batch/<translate>
en</translate>|<translate>
banner</translate>}}
</ul>
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Options/<translate>
en</translate>}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Help/<translate>
en</translate>}}
<translate>
See</translate> [[Help40:Banners:_Options/<translate> en</translate>|<translate> Banner Manager Options</translate>]] <translate> for more information.</translate>
<translate>

==Quick Tips== 
</translate>
<translate>

* You must add at least one</translate> [[Help40:Banners:_Clients/<translate> en</translate>|<translate> Banner Client</translate>]] <translate> and</translate> [[Help40:Banners:_Categories/<translate> en</translate>|<translate> Banner Category</translate>]] <translate> ''before'' you can</translate> [[Help40:Banners:_Edit/<translate> en</translate>|<translate> add a Banner</translate>]].
<translate>

==Related Information== 
</translate>


{| class="wikitable"
|-
! <translate>
Related Help Screens</translate> !! <translate>
Description</translate>
|-
| [[Help40:Banners:_Edit/<translate> en</translate>|<translate>
Banners: Edit</translate>]] || <translate>
Used to add or edit banners which can be displayed on your Joomla! website. Remember to create at least one</translate> [[Help40:Components_Banners_Clients/<translate> en</translate>|<translate> Banner Client</translate>]] <translate> and one</translate>[[Help40:Components_Banners_Categories/<translate> en</translate>|<translate> Banner Category</translate>]] <translate> before creating any Banners.</translate>
|-
| [[Help40:Banners:_Options/<translate> en</translate>|<translate>
Banners: Options</translate>]] || <translate>
Global options (configuration) for Banner Clients.</translate>
|-
| [[Help40:Banners:_Categories/<translate> en</translate>|<translate> Banners: Categories</translate>]] || <translate>
Used to view a list of existing Banner Categories, edit current and create new Banner Categories. Note that Banner Categories are separate from other Categories, such as for Articles, Contacts, News Feeds, and Web Links. There must be at least one Banner Client and Banner Category before a Banner can be created.</translate>
|-
| [[Help40:Banners:_New_or_Edit_Category/<translate> en</translate>|<translate>
Banners: New or Edit Category</translate>]] || <translate>
This is where you can add a new Banner Category or edit an existing one. Note that you need to create at least one Banner Category before you can create a Banner. Also, Banner Categories are separate from other types of Categories, such as those for Articles, Contacts, and News Feeds.</translate>
|-
| [[Help40:Banners:_Clients/<translate> en</translate>|<translate>
Banners: Clients</translate>]] || <translate>
The Banner Client Manager is where you can edit existing Banner Clients or create new ones. Note that you must have at least one Banner Client and one Banner Category defined before you can add your first Banner.</translate>
|-
| [[Help40:Banners:_New_or_Edit_Client/<translate> en</translate>|<translate>
Banners: New or Edit Client</translate>]] || <translate>
This is where you add a new Banner Client or edit an existing one. Note that you need to create at least one Banner Client before you can create a Banner.</translate>
|-
| [[Help40:Banners:_Tracks/<translate> en</translate>|<translate>
Banners: Tracks</translate>]] || <translate>
Used to view a list of existing Banner Tracking information.</translate>
|}

{{Cathelp|4.0,4.1,4.2,4.3,4.4|Banner Manager Help Screens|Components Help Screens}}

Help4.x:Articles: Featured

2023-09-03T22:00:29Z

Heelc29: Help screen 4.4

<noinclude><languages /></noinclude>
<translate>

==Description== 


Used to control which 'Featured Articles' are displayed on the Front Page and in what order they are displayed. The Front Page is often the Home page of a web site, but it can be any page in the site.

==How to Access== 


{{<tvar name=1>rarr</tvar>|Content,Featured Articles}}


To add a Article:</translate>
*<translate> click the '''New''' toolbar button</translate>
<translate> To edit a Article:</translate>
*<translate> select a '''Title''' from the list</translate>
{{anchor|screenshot}}
<translate>

==Screenshot== 
</translate>
:[[File:Help-4x-Content-Featured-Articles-screen-<translate> en</translate>.png|800px|none]]
<translate>

==Column Headers== 
</translate>
*'''<translate> Checkbox</translate>'''. <translate> Check this box to select articles. To select all articles, check the box in the column heading. After boxes are checked the toolbar button 'Actions' get active.</translate>
*{{anchor|ordering}}'''<translate> Ordering</translate>'''. <translate> You can change the order of an article within a list as follows:</translate>
**<translate> Select the Ordering icon [[<tvar name=1>File:Help-4x-Ordering-colheader-icon.png|9px|</tvar>|Ordering icon]] in the List heading to make it active.</translate>
**<translate> Select one of the Three dots icons [[<tvar name=1>File:Help-4x-Ordering-colheader-grab-bar-icon.png|5px||</tvar>|Three dots icon]] and drag it up or down to change the position of that row in the list.</translate>
**<translate> In the Filter Options you may limit the list to articles that are assigned for example to a Language.</translate>
*'''<translate> Featured</translate>'''. <translate> Click the icon to unfeature.</translate>
*'''<translate> Status</translate>'''. <translate> Status of article. Hover icon for informations.</translate>
*'''<translate> Title</translate>'''. <translate> The title of the article. Edit the article by clicking on the Title.</translate>
*'''<translate> Access</translate>'''. <translate> The viewing [[<tvar name=1>Help4.x:Users:_Viewing_Access_Levels</tvar>/en|Access Level]] for this article.</translate>
*'''<translate> Author</translate>'''. <translate> Name of the User who created this article.</translate>
*'''<translate> Associations</translate>'''. <translate> Shows the associated articles. Click on the Language Code to open the article.</translate> <translate> [[<tvar name=1>Help4.x:Multilingual_Associations</tvar>/en|Multilingual only.]]</translate>
*'''<translate> Language</translate>'''. <translate> Articles language, default is 'All'.</translate>
*'''<translate> Date Created</translate>'''. <translate> The date this article was created.</translate>
*'''<translate> Hits</translate>'''. <translate> The number of times an article has been viewed.</translate>
*'''<translate> ID</translate>'''. <translate> A unique identification number for this article, you cannot change this number. When creating a new article, this field displays <tvar name=1>'0'</tvar> until you save the new entry.</translate>
<translate>

==List Filters== 
</translate>
'''<translate> Search bar</translate>'''. <translate> Near the top of the page you will see the search bar shown in the [[<tvar name=1>#screenshot</tvar>|Screenshot]] above.</translate>
*'''<translate> Search by Text</translate>'''. <translate> Enter part of the search term and click the Search icon. ''Hover'' to see a ''Tooltip'' indicating which fields will be searched.</translate>{{-}}<translate> To 'Search by ID' enter <tvar name=1>"id:x"</tvar>, where <tvar name=2>"x"</tvar> is the ID number (for example, <tvar name=3>"id:19"</tvar>).</translate>
*'''<translate> Filter Options</translate>'''. <translate> Click to display the additional filters.</translate>
*'''<translate> Clear</translate>'''. <translate> Click to clear the Filter field and restore the list to its unfiltered state.</translate>
*'''<translate> Ordering</translate>'''. <translate> Shows the current list ordering field. 2 ways to change the order:</translate>
**<translate> Select from the dropdown list. Ordering may be in ascending or descending order.</translate>
**<translate> Click a column heading. The column heading toggles between ascending and descending order.</translate>
*'''<translate> Number to Display</translate>'''. <translate> Shows the number of articles in a list. Select from the dropdown list to change the number displayed.</translate>{{-}}<translate> The default for a site is <tvar name=1>'20'</tvar> but this may be changed in the [[<tvar name=2>Help4.x:Site_Global_Configuration</tvar>/en<tvar name=3>#defaultlistlimit</tvar>|Global Configuration]].</translate>
<translate>

===Filter Options=== 


Near the top of the page you will see the filter bar shown in the [[<tvar name=1>#screenshot</tvar>|Screenshot]] above.
</translate>
*'''<translate> Select Status</translate>'''. <translate> Select from Trashed / Unpublished / Published / Archived / All.</translate>
*'''<translate> Select Category</translate>'''. <translate> Select from the list of available categories.</translate>
*'''<translate> Select Access</translate>'''. <translate> Select from the list of available viewing access levels.</translate>
*'''<translate> Select Author</translate>'''. <translate> Select from the list of available authors.</translate>
*'''<translate> Select Language</translate>'''. <translate> Select from the list of available languages.</translate>
*'''<translate> Select Tag</translate>'''. <translate> Select from the list of available tags.</translate>
*'''<translate> Select Max Levels</translate>'''. <translate> Select from the list of available levels.</translate>
<translate>

===Pagination=== 
</translate>
'''<translate> Page Controls</translate>'''. <translate> When the number of articles is more than one page, you will see a page control bar near the bottom of the page shown in the [[<tvar name=1>#screenshot</tvar>|Screenshot]] above. The current page number being viewed has a dark colour background.</translate>
*'''<translate> Start</translate>'''. <translate> Click to go to the first page.</translate>
*'''<translate> Prev</translate>'''. <translate> Click to go to the previous page.</translate>
*'''<translate> Page numbers</translate>'''. <translate> Click to go to the desired page.</translate>
*'''<translate> Next</translate>'''. <translate> Click to go to the next page.</translate>
*'''<translate> End</translate>'''. <translate> Click to go to the last page.</translate>
<translate>

==Toolbar== 


At the top of the page you will see the toolbar shown in the [[<tvar name=1>#screenshot</tvar>|Screenshot]] above.</translate>
*'''<translate> New</translate>'''. <translate> Opens the editing screen to create a new article.</translate>
*'''<translate> Actions</translate>'''. <translate> Reveals a list of actions for selected articles. Check one or more articles checkboxes to activate the list.</translate>
**'''<translate> Publish</translate>'''. <translate> Makes the selected articles available to visitors to your website.</translate>
**'''<translate> Unpublish</translate>'''. <translate> Makes the selected articles unavailable to visitors to your website.</translate>
**'''<translate> Unfeature</translate>'''. <translate> Changes the status of featured articles to unfeatured.</translate>
**'''<translate> Archive</translate>'''. <translate> Changes the status of the selected articles to indicate that they are archived.</translate> <translate> [[<tvar name=1>J4.x:How_to_Archive_an_Article</tvar>/en|Learn more.]]</translate>
**'''<translate> Check-In</translate>'''. <translate> Checks-in the selected articles.</translate>
**'''<translate> Trash</translate>'''. <translate> Changes the status of the selected articles to indicate that they are trashed.</translate> <translate> [[<tvar name=1>J4.x:Deleting_an_Article</tvar>/en|Learn more.]]</translate>
*'''<translate> Options</translate>'''. <translate> Opens [[<tvar name=1>Help4.x:Articles:_Options</tvar>/en|Articles: Options]].</translate>
*'''<translate> Help</translate>'''. <translate> Opens this help screen.</translate>
<translate>

==Quick Tips== 
</translate>
*<translate> If Joomla is installed without sample data, one article category called 'Uncategorised' is created automatically.</translate>
*<translate> To see trashed and archived articles, set the Status filter to 'All'.</translate>
*<translate> To change the ordering of articles within a category, click on the Ordering column heading to sort by this column. Also, it is easier to see the ordering if you filter on the desired category.</translate>
<translate>

==Related Information== 
</translate>
{{:Chunk4x:Help_screen_related_Articles/<translate> en</translate>}}

{{Cathelp|4.0,4.1,4.2,4.3,4.4|Frontpage Manager Help Screens|Content Help Screens}}

Help4.x:Articles: Edit Category

2023-09-03T22:00:00Z

Heelc29: Help screen 4.4

<noinclude><languages /></noinclude>
<translate>

==Description== 
</translate>
{{Chunk4x:Help Screen Description Categories/<translate> en</translate>}}

<translate>

The edit form is used to create a new Category or to alter the properties of an existing Category.
</translate>
<translate>

==How to Access== 
</translate>
<translate>

To add a new category, starting from the Administrator menu:
</translate>
<translate>

* Select {{rarr|Home Dashboard,Site panel,Categories + button}}. Or...</translate>
<translate>

*Select {{rarr|Content,Categories + button}}. Or...
</translate>
<translate>

*Select {{rarr|Content,Categories}}. Then...</translate>
<translate>

**Select the '''New''' button in the Toolbar to create a new Category. Or...</translate>
<translate>

To edit an existing Category:
</translate>
<translate>

*Select {{rarr|Content,Categories}}. Then...</translate>
<translate>

**Select a '''Category title''' From the list of categories.
</translate>
<translate>

==Screenshot== 
</translate>
:[[File:Help-4x-Components-Content-Categories-Edit-screen-<translate> en</translate>.png|800px]]
<translate>

==Form Fields== 
</translate>
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Colheader Enter Title/<translate> en</translate>}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Alias/<translate> en</translate>}}
{{anchor|content}}
<translate>

===Category Tab=== 
</translate>
<translate>

'''Left Panel'''
</translate>
{{Chunk4x:Help_screen_column_header_Description/<translate> en</translate>}}
<ul>
<li>
{{Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Toggle_Editor/<translate> en</translate>}}
</li>
</ul>
<translate>

'''Right Panel'''
</translate>
<translate>

*'''Parent.''' The item (category, menu item, and so on) that is the parent of the item being edited.</translate>
<translate>

*'''Status.''' (Published/Unpublished/Archived/Trashed) The published status of the item.</translate>
<translate>

*'''Access Level.''' Who has access to this item. Default options are:</translate>
<translate>

**'''Public:''' Everyone has access</translate>
<translate>

**'''Guest:''' Everyone has access</translate>
<translate>

**'''Registered:''' Only registered users have access</translate>
<translate>

**'''Special:''' Only users with author status or higher have access</translate>
<translate>

**'''Super Users:''' Only super users have access</translate>
<translate>

**Enter the desired level using the drop-down list box. Custom Access Control Levels created will show if they exist.</translate>
<translate>

*'''Language.''' Item language.</translate>
<translate>

*'''Tags.''' Enter one or more optional tags for this item. You can select existing tags by entering in the first few letters. You may also create new tags by entering them here. Tags allow you to see lists of related items across content types (for example, articles, contacts, and categories).</translate>
<translate>

*'''Note.''' Item note. This is normally for the site administrator's use (for example, to document information about this item) and does not show in the front end of the site.</translate>
<translate>

*'''Version Note.''' Optional field to identify this version of the item in the item's [[Help40:Components_Version_History/en|Version History]] window.</translate>{{anchor|choosealayout}}{{anchor|options}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Add Category Options/<translate> en</translate>}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Add Category Workflow/<translate> en</translate>}}{{anchor|publishing}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Add Category Publishing Options/<translate> en</translate>}}{{anchor|associations}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Add Category Associations/<translate> en</translate>}}{{anchor|permissions}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Add Category Permissions/<translate> en</translate>}}
<translate>

==Toolbar== 
</translate>
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_top_descriptor/<translate> en</translate>}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Save/<translate> en</translate>|<translate> category</translate>}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_SaveAndClose/<translate> en</translate>|<translate> category</translate>}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_SaveAndNew/<translate> en</translate>|<translate> category</translate>}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_SaveAsCopy/<translate> en</translate>|<translate> category</translate>}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Cancel/<translate> en</translate>}} <translate> Or</translate>
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Close/<translate> en</translate>}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Versions/<translate> en</translate>|<translate> category</translate>}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Help/<translate> en</translate>}}
<translate>

==Related Information== 
</translate>
*[[Help40:Editors/<translate> en</translate>|<translate> TinyMCE and Code Mirror Editors</translate>]]
<translate>

*To work with existing Categories: [[Help40:Articles:_Categories/en|Category Manager]]</translate>
<translate>

*To work with Articles: [[Help40:Articles/en|Article Manager]]</translate>

{{Cathelp|4.0,4.1,4.2,4.3,4.4|Category Management Help Screens|Content Help Screens}}

Help4.x:Articles: Edit

2023-09-03T21:59:29Z

Heelc29: Help screen 4.4

<noinclude><languages /></noinclude>
<translate>

==Description== 


This screen is used to add a new or edit a existing Article, usually using a Wysiwyg editor. The default editor is TinyMCE but if other editors are installed the default editor may be set to something else for the site as a whole or for individual users.


Most parameters have suitable defaults but you might wish to set a specific Category or provide article-specific Metadata.

==How to Access== 


{{rarr|Content,Articles}}


To add a Article:</translate>
*<translate> click the '''New''' toolbar button</translate>
<translate> To edit a Article:</translate>
*<translate> select a '''Title''' from the list</translate>
{{anchor|screenshot}}
<translate>

==Screenshot== 
</translate>
:[[File:Help-4x-content-article-manager-add-new-article-<translate> en</translate>.png|800px]]
<translate>

==Form Fields== 
</translate>
*'''<translate> Title</translate>'''. <translate> The Title for this article.</translate>
*'''<translate> Alias</translate>'''. <translate> The internal name of this article. Normally, you can leave this blank and Joomla will fill in a default value Title in lower case and with dashes instead of spaces.</translate> <translate> [[Alias/en|Learn more.]]</translate>
{{anchor|content}}
<translate>

===Content=== 
</translate>
'''<translate> Left Panel</translate>'''

*'''<translate> Article Text</translate>'''. <translate> This is where you enter the contents of the article. Joomla includes 3 editors, the default [[Help4.x:Editors/en#tinymce|Editor - TinyMCE]] is shown here.</translate>
<ul>
:[[File:Help-4x-Article-Editor-buttons-<translate> en</translate>.png|600px]]
<translate>

The CMS Content dropdown list provides for access to link to an Article, Contact, Field, Media, Menu, or Module.</translate> <translate> [[Help4.x:Editors/en#cmscontent|Learn more.]]</translate>
</ul>
*'''<translate> Toggle Editor</translate>'''. <translate> A Toggle Editor button show below the edit window. This button allows you to toggle between TinyMCE and [[Help4.x:Editors/en#none|Editor - None]].</translate>
'''<translate> Right Panel</translate>'''
*'''<translate> Status</translate>'''. <translate> The published status of this article.</translate>
**<translate> Published</translate>: <translate> Article is visible in the Frontend of the site.</translate>
**<translate> Unpublished</translate>: <translate> Article is will not be visible to guests in the Frontend of the site. It may be visible to logged in users who have [[#permissions|edit state permission]] for the article.</translate>
**<translate> Archived</translate>: <translate> Article will no longer show on menu items [[Help4.x:Menu_Item:_Category_Blog/en|Category Blog]] or [[Help4.x:Menu_Item:_Category_List/en|Category List.]]</translate>
**<translate> Trashed</translate>: <translate> Article is deleted from the site but still in the database.</translate> <translate> [[J4.x:Deleting_an_Article/en|Learn more.]]</translate>
*'''<translate> Category</translate>'''. <translate> Select the Category for this article.</translate>
*'''<translate> Featured</translate>'''. <translate> Select Yes if article will be shown in the [[Help4.x:Menu_Item:_Featured_Articles/en|Featured menu item.]]</translate>
*'''<translate> Access</translate>'''. <translate> Select the viewing access level for this article. The access levels depend on what has been set up in [[Help4.x:Users:_Viewing_Access_Levels/en|Users: Access Levels]].</translate>
*'''<translate> Language</translate>'''. <translate> Select the language for this article. Keep the default of 'All' if you are not using the [[Help4.x:Extensions:_Languages/en|multi-language feature]].</translate>
*'''<translate> Tags</translate>'''. <translate> Assign tags to this article. You may select a tag from a [[Help4.x:Tags/en|pre-defined list]] or enter a new tag by typing the name in the field and pressing enter.</translate>
*'''<translate> Note</translate>'''. <translate> This is normally for the administrator's use (for example, to document information about this article) and does not show in the Frontend.</translate>
*'''<translate> Version Note</translate>'''. <translate> Optional field to identify the version of this article in the article's [[Help4.x:Components_Version_History/en|Version History]].</translate>
{{anchor|imagesandlinks}}
<translate>

===Images and Links=== 
</translate>
'''<translate> Note</translate>''': <translate> This can be hidden by a user with Admin permissions in the [[Help4.x:Articles:_Options/en|Article: Options]].</translate> <translate> This section lets you display images and links in your articles using standardised layouts.</translate>

:[[File:Help-4x-screenshot-article-edit-images-links-<translate> en</translate>.png|600px]]

'''<translate> Intro Image</translate>'''
*'''<translate> Intro Image</translate>'''. <translate> Click the Select button to select an image to be displayed in a fixed location in the Intro Text of this article. This will open a window that allows you to select an image from your images folder.</translate> <translate> [[Adding_an_image_to_an_article/en|Learn more.]]</translate>
*'''<translate> Image Description (Alt Text)</translate>'''. <translate> Set the alt attribute for this image. A few descriptive words for screen readers.</translate>
*'''<translate> No Description</translate>'''. <translate> Check in the rare instance of a purely decorative image. Note that if the Image Description is empty and the No Description checkbox is unchecked then the image will fail to meet accessibility criteria. If an image description is present this checkbox has no effect.</translate>
*'''<translate> Image Class</translate>'''. <translate> You can add any CSS class for your own styling ideas. For image position use for example float-start and float-end.</translate> <translate> [https://cassiopeia.joomla.com/help Learn more.]</translate>
*'''<translate> Caption</translate>'''. <translate> Create a caption for this image.</translate>
'''<translate> Full Article Image</translate>'''
*'''<translate> Full Article Image</translate>'''. <translate> Click the Select button to select an image to be displayed in a fixed location in the Full Text of this article. This will open a window that allows you to select an image from your images folder.</translate> <translate> [[Adding_an_image_to_an_article/en|Learn more.]]</translate>
*'''<translate> Image Description (Alt Text)</translate>'''. <translate> Set the alt attribute for this image. A few descriptive words for screen readers.</translate>
*'''<translate> No Description</translate>'''. <translate> Check in the rare instance of a purely decorative image. Note that if the Image Description is empty and the No Description checkbox is unchecked then the image will fail to meet accessibility criteria. If an image description is present this checkbox has no effect.</translate>
*'''<translate> Image Class</translate>'''. <translate> You can add any CSS class for your own styling ideas. For image position use for example float-start and float-end.</translate> <translate> [https://cassiopeia.joomla.com/help Learn more.]</translate>
*'''<translate> Caption</translate>'''. <translate> Enter an optional caption for this image.</translate>
'''<translate> Link A</translate>'''
*'''<translate> Link A</translate>'''. <translate> The URL for the first link to be displayed in a fixed location in the article text. This must be a full URL, not relative. For example, it normally would start with <nowiki>'https://'</nowiki>.</translate>
*'''<translate> Link A Text</translate>'''. <translate> The text used for Link A. If blank, the URL will be displayed.</translate>
*'''<translate> URL Target Window</translate>'''. <translate> Sets the default value for the target for the first Link in this article. Choices are:</translate>
**<translate> Open in parent window</translate>: <translate> Opens the in the main browser window, replacing the current Joomla article.</translate>
**<translate> Open in new window</translate>: <translate> Opens the link in a new browser window.</translate>
**<translate> Open in popup</translate>: <translate> Opens the link in a pop-up browser window (without full navigation controls).</translate>
**<translate> Modal</translate>: <translate> Opens the link in a modal pop-up window.</translate>
'''<translate> Link B</translate>''', '''<translate> Link C</translate>''': <translate> Same options as Link A.</translate>
{{anchor|options}}
<translate>

===Options=== 
</translate>
'''<translate> Note</translate>''': <translate> This can be hidden by a user with Admin permissions in the [[Help4.x:Articles:_Options/en|Article: Options]].</translate> <translate> This is a set of options you can use to control how this article will show in the Frontend.</translate>
:[[File:Help-4x-screenshot-article-edit-article-options-<translate> en</translate>.png|600px]]
'''<translate> Layout</translate>'''
*'''<translate> Layout</translate>'''. <translate> Use a layout from the supplied article view or [[Help4.x:Templates:_Customise/en|overrides in the templates]].</translate>
*'''<translate> Title</translate>'''. <translate> Show the Article's Title.</translate>
*'''<translate> Linked Titles</translate>'''. <translate> Show the title as a link to the article.</translate>
*'''<translate> Tags</translate>'''. <translate> Enter tags for this article. Select existing tags by entering in the first few letters or create new tags by entering them here.</translate> <translate> [[J4.x:How_To_Use_Content_Tags_in_Joomla/en|Learn more.]]</translate>
*{{anchor|introtext}}'''<translate> Intro Text</translate>'''.
**<translate> Show</translate>: <translate> The Intro Text of the article will show when you drill down to the article.</translate>
**<translate> Hide</translate>: <translate> Only the part of the article after the Read More break will show.</translate>
*'''<translate> Position of Article Info</translate>'''.
**<translate> Above</translate>: <translate> Puts the article information block above the text.</translate>
**<translate> Below</translate>: <translate> Puts the article information block below the text.</translate>
**<translate> Split</translate>: <translate> Splits the article information block into 2 separate blocks. One block is above and the other is below the text.</translate>
*'''<translate> Article Info Title</translate>'''. <translate> Displays 'Details' on top of the article information block.</translate>
'''<translate> Category</translate>'''
*'''<translate> Category</translate>'''. <translate> Show the Article's Category Title.</translate>
*'''<translate> Link Category</translate>'''. <translate> Show the title as a link to that Category.</translate>
*'''<translate> Parent Category</translate>'''. <translate> Show the Article's Parent Category Title.</translate>
*'''<translate> Link Parent Category</translate>'''. <translate> Show the title as a link to that Category.</translate>
'''<translate> Associations</translate>'''
*'''<translate> Associations</translate>'''. <translate> Show the associated flags or Language Code.</translate> <translate> [[Help4.x:Multilingual_Associations/en|Multilingual only.]]</translate>
'''<translate> Author</translate>'''
*'''<translate> Author</translate>'''. <translate> Show the author of the Article.</translate>
*'''<translate> Link to Author's Contact Page</translate>'''. <translate> Show it as a link to a Contact layout for that author.</translate>{{-}}<translate> Note: The author must be [[Help4.x:Contacts/en|set up as a Contact]].</translate>
'''<translate> Date</translate>'''
*'''<translate> Create Date</translate>'''. <translate> Show the Article's create date.</translate>
*'''<translate> Modify Date</translate>'''. <translate> Show the Article's modify date.</translate>
*'''<translate> Publish Date</translate>'''. <translate> Show the Article's start publishing date.</translate>
'''<translate> Options</translate>'''
*'''<translate> Navigation</translate>'''. <translate> Show a navigation link 'Prev' or 'Next' when you drill down to the article.</translate>
*'''<translate> Hits</translate>'''. <translate> Show the number of times the article has been displayed by a user.</translate>
*'''<translate> Unauthorised Links</translate>'''. <translate> If Yes, the Intro Text for restricted articles will show. Clicking on the Read more link will require users to log in to view the full article content.</translate>
*'''<translate> Positioning of the Links</translate>.'''
**<translate> Above</translate>: <translate> Links are shown above the content.</translate>
**<translate> Below</translate>: <translate> Links are shown below the content.</translate>
*'''<translate> Read More Text</translate>'''. <translate> Customise the text that shows for the default wording 'Read more'.</translate>
*'''<translate> Browser Page Title</translate>'''. <translate> Text for the Browser page title to be used when the article is viewed with a non-article menu item. If blank, the article's title is used instead.</translate>
<translate>

===Fields=== 


This section shows the [[Help4.x:Fields/en|custom fields]] which are defined for this article.</translate>

:[[File:Help-4x-Content-Article-Manager-Edit-Fields-options-subscreen-<translate> en</translate>.png|600px]]
{{anchor|publishing}}
<translate>

===Publishing=== 
</translate>
'''<translate> Note</translate>''': <translate> This can be hidden by a user with Admin permissions in the [[Help4.x:Articles:_Options/en|Article: Options]].</translate> <translate>  This section allows you to enter parameters and [[Using_The_Meta_Description/en|Metadata]] for this Article.</translate>

:[[File:Help-4x-Content-Article-Manager-Edit-publishing-options-subscreen-<translate> en</translate>.png|600px|none]]

'''<translate> Publishing</translate>'''
*'''<translate> Start Publishing</translate>'''. <translate> Date and time to start publishing. Enter article ahead of time and then have it published automatically at a future time.</translate>
*'''<translate> Finish Publishing</translate>'''. <translate> Date and time to finish publishing. The article is automatically changed to Unpublished state at a future time.</translate>
*'''<translate> Start Featured</translate>'''. <translate> Date and time to start featured state. Enter article ahead of time and then have it featured automatically at a future time.</translate>
*'''<translate> Finish Featured</translate>'''. <translate> Date and time to finish featured state. The article is automatically changed to Unfeatured state at a future time.</translate>
*'''<translate> Created Date</translate>'''. <translate> The current time when the Article was created. Enter in a different date and time or click on the calendar icon to find the desired date.</translate>
*'''<translate> Created By</translate>'''. <translate> Name of the User who created this Article. This will default to the currently logged-in user. If you want to change this to a different user, click the Select User button.</translate>{{anchor|createdbyalias}}
*'''<translate> Created by Alias</translate>'''. <translate> Enter in an alias for the Author of this Article. This allows you to display a different Author name.</translate>
*'''<translate> Modified Date</translate>'''. <translate> Date of last modification.</translate>
*'''<translate> Modified By</translate>'''. <translate> Username who performed the last modification.</translate>
*'''<translate> Revision</translate>'''. <translate> Number of revisions to this Article.</translate>
*'''<translate> Hits</translate>'''. <translate> The number of times this Article has been viewed.</translate>
*'''<translate> ID</translate>'''. <translate> A unique identification number for this Article, you cannot change this number. When creating a new Article, this field displays "0" until you save the new entry.</translate>
'''<translate> Metadata</translate>'''
*'''<translate> Meta Description</translate>'''. <translate> An paragraph to be used as the description of the page.</translate> <translate> [[Using_The_Meta_Description/en|Learn more.]]</translate>
*'''<translate> Keywords</translate>'''. <translate> Entry for keywords.</translate> <translate> [[Using_Keywords/en|Learn more.]]</translate>
*'''<translate> Robots</translate>'''. <translate> The instructions for web 'robots' that browse to this page.</translate> <translate> Set 'Use Global' in [[Help4.x:Site_Global_Configuration/en#robots|Global Configuration]].</translate>
*'''<translate> Author</translate>'''. <translate> Entry for an Author name within the metadata.</translate>
*'''<translate> Content Rights</translate>'''. <translate> Describe what rights others have to use this content.</translate>
{{anchor|associations}}
<translate>

===Associations=== 
</translate>
'''<translate> Note</translate>''': <translate> This can be hidden by a user with Admin permissions in the [[Help4.x:Articles:_Options/en|Article: Options]].</translate> <translate> Tab is shown on [[Help4.x:Multilingual_Associations/en|Multilingual Sites]] only.</translate>

:[[File:Help-4x-screenshot-article-edit-associations-<translate> en</translate>.png|600px]]
{{anchor|configureeditscreen}}
<translate>

===Configure Edit Screen=== 
</translate>
'''<translate> Note</translate>''': <translate> This can be hidden by a user with Admin permissions in the [[Help4.x:Articles:_Options/en|Article: Options]].</translate>
:[[File:Help-4x-screenshot-article-edit-configure-edit-screen-<translate> en</translate>.png|600px]]
*'''<translate> Publishing Options</translate>'''. <translate> If Hide, the [[Help4.x:Articles:_Edit/en#publishing|Publishing Options tab]] will not show in the Backend. This means that Backend users will not be able to edit the fields in this tab. These fields will always be set to their default values.</translate>
*'''<translate> Article Options</translate>'''. <translate> If Hide, the [[Help4.x:Articles:_Edit/en#options|Article Options tab]] will not show in the Backend. This means that Backend users will not be able to edit the fields in this tab. These fields will always be set to their default values.</translate>
*'''<translate> Administrator Images and Links</translate>'''. <translate> If Yes, the [[Help4.x:Articles:_Edit/en#imagesandlinks|Images and Links tab]] will show. </translate>
*'''<translate> Frontend Images and Links</translate>'''. <translate> If Yes, the Images and Links tab will show in the Frontend article editor screen. </translate>
{{anchor|permissions}}
<translate>

===Permissions=== 
</translate>
'''<translate> Note</translate>''': <translate> This can be hidden by a user with Admin permissions in the [[Help4.x:Articles:_Options/en|Article: Options]].</translate> <translate> This is where you can enter permissions for this article.</translate> <translate> [[J3.x:Access_Control_List_Tutorial/en#hierarchylevels|Learn more.]]</translate>
:[[File:Help-4x-screenshot-article-edit-permissions-<translate> en</translate>.png|600px]]
<translate>

To change the permissions for this article, do the following.</translate>
#<translate> Select the '''Group''' by clicking its title located on the left.</translate>
#<translate> Find the desired '''Action'''.</translate>
#*'''<translate> Delete</translate>'''. <translate> Users can delete this article.</translate>
#*'''<translate> Edit</translate>'''. <translate> Users can edit this article.</translate>
#*'''<translate> Edit State</translate>'''. <translate> User can change the published state and related information for this article.</translate>
#<translate> Select the desired permission for the action you wish to change.</translate>
#*'''<translate> Inherited</translate>'''. <translate> Inherited for users in this Group from the [[Help4.x:Site_Global_Configuration/en#permissions|Global Configuration]], [[Help4.x:Articles:_Options/en#permissions|Articles Options]], or [[Help4.x:Articles:_Edit_Category/en#permissions|Articles Category]].</translate>
#*'''<translate> Allowed</translate>'''. <translate> Allowed for users in this Group.</translate>{{-}}<translate> Note: If this action is Denied at one of the higher levels, the Allowed permission here will not take effect. A Denied setting cannot be overridden.</translate>
#*'''<translate> Denied</translate>'''. <translate> Denied for users in this Group.</translate>
#<translate> Click '''Save''' in '''Toolbar''' at top. When the screen refreshes, the Calculated Setting column will show the effective permission for this Group and Action.</translate>
<translate>

==Toolbar== 


At the top of the page you will see the toolbar shown in the [[#screenshot|Screenshot]] above.</translate>
*'''<translate> Save</translate>'''. <translate> Saves the article and stays in the current screen.</translate>
*'''<translate> Save & Close</translate>'''. <translate> Saves the article and closes the current screen.</translate>
**'''<translate> Save & New</translate>'''. <translate> Saves the article and keeps the editing screen open and ready to create another article.</translate>
**'''<translate> Save to Menu</translate>'''. <translate> Saves the article to a menu item and opens the menu item screen.</translate>
**'''<translate> Save as Copy</translate>'''. <translate> Saves your changes to a copy of the current article. Does not affect the current article.</translate>
*'''<translate> Close</translate>'''. <translate> Closes the current screen and returns to the previous screen without saving any modifications you may have made.</translate>
*'''<translate> Versions</translate>'''. <translate> Opens the Article Version History window to show any prior versions of this article. This allows you to view older versions of this article and, if desired, restore from an older version.</translate> <translate> [[Help4.x:Components_Version_History/en|Learn more.]]</translate>
*'''<translate> Preview</translate>'''. <translate> Opens a modal dialog showing a site view of this article. Requires [[Help4.x:Site_Global_Configuration/en#sharedsessions|shared sessions]] or being logged in into the Frontend.</translate>
*'''<translate> Accessibility Check</translate>'''. <translate> Opens a window showing accessibility check results of the article.</translate>
*'''<translate> Associations</translate>'''. <translate> With a specific language set for an article, allows side by side editing in another language.</translate> <translate> This icon is shown on [[Help4.x:Multilingual_Associations/en|Multilingual Sites]] only.</translate>
*'''<translate> Toggle Inline Help</translate>'''. <translate> Show help text below some options.</translate>
*'''<translate> Help</translate>'''. <translate> Opens this help screen.</translate>
<translate>

==Quick Tips== 
</translate>
*<translate> There are 2 methods to insert an image into article using the TinyMCE editor.</translate>
*#<translate> The [[Help4.x:Editors/en#cmscontent|CMS Content]] dropdown list provides access to the [[Help4.x:Media/en|Media screen]] that lets you browse image files and upload images.</translate>
*#<translate> The 'Insert' dropdown list is a simple form for which you need to know the image url. It is used for external images.</translate>
*<translate> [[Help4.x:Editors/en#readmore|Read more]] breaks allow you to save space on the Front Page or on any blog layout page by showing just the first portion of an Article. [[Help4.x:Editors/en#pagebreak|Page break]] allow you to provide multi-page navigation for long Articles. You can use both on one Article, if desired.</translate>{{-}}<translate> For example, you could put a Read more break after the first paragraph of a multi-page article, and have Page breaks after each page. No page navigation would display on the Front Page until the User selects the Read more link. At that time, the Article's table of contents would display showing links to every page.</translate>
<translate>

==Related Information== 
</translate>

{{:Chunk4x:Help_screen_related_Articles/<translate> en</translate>}}

{{Cathelp|4.0,4.1,4.2,4.3,4.4|Article Manager Help Screens|Content Help Screens}}

Help4.x:Articles: Categories

2023-09-03T21:58:56Z

Heelc29: Articles:_Categories

<noinclude><languages /></noinclude>
<translate>

==Description== 


The Articles Categories list is used to find, add, and edit articles categories.</translate>

<translate>

Categories are are used to organise Articles for ease of management and display. They can be organised into tree-like structures like file systems. All Articles must be assigned either to a parent Category or a child Category.</translate>
<translate>

==How to Access== 


{{<tvar name=1>rarr</tvar>|Home Dashboard,Site,Article Categories}}


To add a Category:</translate>
*<translate> click the '''New''' toolbar button</translate>
<translate> To edit a Category:</translate>
*<translate> select a '''Title''' from the list</translate>
{{anchor|screenshot}}
<translate>

==Screenshot== 
</translate>
:[[File:Help-4x-Content-Categories-screen-<translate> en</translate>.png|800px|none]]
<translate>

==Column Headers== 
</translate>
*'''<translate> Checkbox</translate>'''. <translate> Check this box to select categories. To select all categories, check the box in the column heading. After boxes are checked the toolbar button 'Actions' get active.</translate>
*{{anchor|ordering}}'''<translate> Ordering</translate>'''. <translate> You can change the order of an category within a list as follows:</translate>
**<translate> Select the Ordering icon [[<tvar name=1>File:Help-4x-Ordering-colheader-icon.png|9px|</tvar>|Ordering icon]] in the List heading to make it active.</translate>
**<translate> Select one of the Three dots icons [[<tvar name=1>File:Help-4x-Ordering-colheader-grab-bar-icon.png|5px||</tvar>|Three dots icon]] and drag it up or down to change the position of that row in the list.</translate>
**<translate> In the Filter Options you may limit the list to categories that are assigned for example to a Language.</translate>
*'''<translate> Status</translate>'''. <translate> Status of category. Hover icon for informations.</translate>
*'''<translate> Title</translate>'''. <translate> The title of the category. Edit the category by clicking on the Title.</translate>
*'''<translate> Icons</translate>'''. <translate> Counts of number of Published, Unpublished, Archived and Trashed Articles in each Category.</translate> <translate> Click on a number to get a list of the categories.</translate>
*'''<translate> Access</translate>'''. <translate> The viewing [[<tvar name=1>Help4.x:Users:_Viewing_Access_Levels</tvar>/en|Access Level]] for this category.</translate>
*'''<translate> Associations</translate>'''. <translate> Shows the associated categories. Click on the Language Code to open the category.</translate> <translate> [[<tvar name=1>Help4.x:Multilingual_Associations</tvar>/en|Multilingual only.]]</translate>
*'''<translate> Language</translate>'''. <translate> Categories language, default is 'All'.</translate>
*'''<translate> ID</translate>'''. <translate> A unique identification number for this category, you cannot change this number.</translate>
<translate>

==List Filters== 
</translate>
'''<translate> Search bar</translate>'''. <translate> Near the top of the page you will see the search bar shown in the [[<tvar name=1>#screenshot</tvar>|Screenshot]] above.</translate>
*'''<translate> Search by Text</translate>'''. <translate> Enter part of the search term and click the Search icon. ''Hover'' to see a ''Tooltip'' indicating which fields will be searched.</translate>{{-}}<translate> To 'Search by ID' enter <tvar name=1>"id:x"</tvar>, where <tvar name=2>"x"</tvar> is the ID number (for example, <tvar name=3>"id:19"</tvar>).</translate>
*'''<translate> Filter Options</translate>'''. <translate> Click to display the additional filters.</translate>
*'''<translate> Clear</translate>'''. <translate> Click to clear the Filter field and restore the list to its unfiltered state.</translate>
*'''<translate> Ordering</translate>'''. <translate> Shows the current list ordering field. 2 ways to change the order:</translate>
**<translate> Select from the dropdown list. Ordering may be in ascending or descending order.</translate>
**<translate> Click a column heading. The column heading toggles between ascending and descending order.</translate>
*'''<translate> Number to Display</translate>'''. <translate> Shows the number of categories in a list. Select from the dropdown list to change the number displayed.</translate>{{-}}<translate> The default for a site is <tvar name=1>'20'</tvar> but this may be changed in the [[<tvar name=2>Help4.x:Site_Global_Configuration</tvar>/en<tvar name=3>#defaultlistlimit</tvar>|Global Configuration]].</translate>
<translate>

===Filter Options=== 


Near the top of the page you will see the filter bar shown in the [[<tvar name=1>#screenshot</tvar>|Screenshot]] above.</translate>
*'''<translate> Select Status</translate>'''. <translate> Select from Trashed / Unpublished / Published / Archived / All.</translate>
*'''<translate> Select Access</translate>'''. <translate> Select from the list of available viewing access levels.</translate>
*'''<translate> Select Language</translate>'''. <translate> Select from the list of available languages.</translate>
*'''<translate> Select Tag</translate>'''. <translate> Select from the list of available tags.</translate>
*'''<translate> Select Max Levels</translate>'''. <translate> Select from the list of available levels.</translate>
<translate>

===Pagination=== 
</translate>
'''<translate> Page Controls</translate>'''. <translate> When the number of categories is more than one page, you will see a page control bar near the bottom of the page shown in the [[<tvar name=1>#screenshot</tvar>|Screenshot]] above. The current page number being viewed has a dark colour background.</translate>
*'''<translate> Start</translate>'''. <translate> Click to go to the first page.</translate>
*'''<translate> Prev</translate>'''. <translate> Click to go to the previous page.</translate>
*'''<translate> Page numbers</translate>'''. <translate> Click to go to the desired page.</translate>
*'''<translate> Next</translate>'''. <translate> Click to go to the next page.</translate>
*'''<translate> End</translate>'''. <translate> Click to go to the last page.</translate>
<translate>

==Toolbar== 


At the top of the page you will see the toolbar shown in the [[<tvar name=1>#screenshot</tvar>|Screenshot]] above.</translate>
*'''<translate> New</translate>'''. <translate> Opens the editing screen to create a new category.</translate>
*'''<translate> Actions</translate>'''. <translate> Reveals a list of actions for selected categories. Check one or more categories checkboxes to activate the list.</translate>
**'''<translate> Publish</translate>'''. <translate> Makes the selected categories available to visitors to your website.</translate>
**'''<translate> Unpublish</translate>'''. <translate> Makes the selected categories unavailable to visitors to your website.</translate>
**'''<translate> Archive</translate>'''. <translate>  Changes the status of the selected categories to indicate that they are archived.</translate> <translate> [[<tvar name=1>J4.x:How_to_Archive_an_Article</tvar>/en|Learn more.]]</translate>
**'''<translate> Check-In</translate>'''. <translate> Checks-in the selected categories.</translate>
**'''<translate> Trash</translate>'''. <translate> Changes the status of the selected categories to indicate that they are trashed.</translate> <translate> [[<tvar name=1>J4.x:Deleting_an_Article</tvar>/en|Learn more.]]</translate>
**'''<translate> Batch</translate>'''. <translate> Batch processes the selected categories.</translate>
*'''<translate> Rebuild</translate>'''. <translate> Reconstructs and refreshes the categories table. Normally, you do not need to rebuild this table. This function is provided in case the data in the table becomes corrupted.</translate>
*'''<translate> Options</translate>'''. <translate> Opens [[<tvar name=1>Help4.x:Articles:_Options</tvar>/en|Articles: Options]].</translate>
*'''<translate> Help</translate>'''. <translate> Opens this help screen.</translate>
<translate>

==Batch Process== 


The Batch Process allows a change in settings for a group of selected categories.</translate>

:[[File:Help-4x-Content-Categories-batch-<translate> en</translate>.png|600px|none]]

<translate>

'''How to Batch Process''' a group of categories:</translate>
# <translate> Select one or more categories on the list by checking the desired checkboxes.</translate>
# <translate> Click the Batch Toolbar button.</translate>
# <translate> Set one or more of the following values:</translate>
#* <translate> To change the '''Language''', select the desired language from the Set Language list box.</translate>
#* <translate> To change the '''Access Levels''', select the desired new access level from the Set Access Level list box.</translate>
#* <translate> To change the '''Category''', select a category. To leave the category unchanged, use the default value of 'Select'.</translate>
#** <translate> To '''copy''' the categories to a different category, select the desired category from the category list box and check the Copy option. In this case, the original categories are unchanged and the copies are assigned to the new category and, if selected, the new language, access level, and tag.</translate>
#** <translate> To '''move''' the categories to a different category, select the desired category from the category list box and check the Move option. In this case, the original categories will be moved to a new category and, if selected, be assigned the new language, access level, and tag.</translate>
#* <translate> To add '''Tags''', select the desired Tags from the dropdown or choose to keep the tags currently added to the original categories.</translate>
# <translate> When all of the settings are entered, click on Process to perform the changes. A message '''"Batch process completed successfully."''' will show.</translate>
<translate>

==Quick Tips== 
</translate>
*<translate> Click on the icon in the Status column to toggle between Published and Unpublished.</translate>
<translate>

==Related Information== 
</translate>
*<translate> [[<tvar name=1>Help4.x:Articles:_Edit_Category</tvar>/en|Articles: Edit Category]]</translate>

*<translate> [[<tvar name=1>Help4.x:Home_Dashboard</tvar>/en|Home Dashboard]]</translate>: <translate> Access to many default Joomla functions.</translate>{{:Chunk4x:Help_screen_related_Articles/<translate> en</translate>}}

{{Cathelp|4.0,4.1,4.2,4.3,4.4|Article Manager Help Screens|Content Help Screens}}

Help4.x:Articles

2023-09-03T21:58:22Z

Heelc29: Help screen 4.4

<noinclude><languages /></noinclude>
<translate>

==Description== 


The Articles list is used to find, mark featured, add, and edit articles.


Articles are the basic units of information in the content system and the bottom level in the content hierarchy. Each Article is in exactly one Category.

==How to Access== 


{{<tvar name=1>rarr</tvar>|Home Dashboard,Site,Articles}}


To add a Article:</translate>
*<translate> click the '''New''' toolbar button</translate>
<translate> To edit a Article:</translate>
*<translate> select a '''Title''' from the list</translate>
{{anchor|screenshot}}
<translate>

==Screenshot== 
</translate>
:[[File:Help-4x-Content-Article-screen-<translate> en</translate>.png|800px]]
<translate>

==Column Headers== 
</translate>
*'''<translate> Checkbox</translate>'''. <translate> Check this box to select articles. To select all articles, check the box in the column heading. After boxes are checked the toolbar button 'Actions' get active.</translate>
*{{anchor|ordering}}'''<translate> Ordering</translate>'''. <translate> You can change the order of an article within a list as follows:</translate>
**<translate> Select the Ordering icon [[<tvar name=1>File:Help-4x-Ordering-colheader-icon.png|9px|</tvar>|Ordering icon]] in the List heading to make it active.</translate>
**<translate> Select one of the Three dots icons [[<tvar name=1>File:Help-4x-Ordering-colheader-grab-bar-icon.png|5px||</tvar>|Three dots icon]] and drag it up or down to change the position of that row in the list.</translate>
**<translate> In the Filter Options you may limit the list to articles that are assigned for example to a Language.</translate>
*'''<translate> Featured</translate>'''. <translate> Click the icon to toggle. The article will show on the [[<tvar name=1>Help4.x:Articles:_Featured</tvar>/en|Featured Articles]] page. </translate>
*'''<translate> Status</translate>'''. <translate> Status of article. Hover icon for informations.</translate>
*'''<translate> Title</translate>'''. <translate> The title of the article. Edit the article by clicking on the Title.</translate>
*'''<translate> Access</translate>'''. <translate> The viewing [[<tvar name=1>Help4.x:Users:_Viewing_Access_Levels</tvar>/en|Access Level]] for this article.</translate>
*'''<translate> Author</translate>'''. <translate> Name of the User who created this article.</translate>
*'''<translate> Associations</translate>'''. <translate> Shows the associated articles. Click on the Language Code to open the article.</translate> <translate> [[<tvar name=1>Help4.x:Multilingual_Associations</tvar>/en|Multilingual only.]]</translate>
*'''<translate> Language</translate>'''. <translate> Articles language, default is 'All'.</translate>
*'''<translate> Date Created</translate>'''. <translate> The date this article was created.</translate>
*'''<translate> Hits</translate>'''. <translate> The number of times an article has been viewed.</translate>
*'''<translate> ID</translate>'''. <translate> A unique identification number for this article, you cannot change this number.</translate>
<translate>

==List Filters== 
</translate>
'''<translate> Search bar</translate>'''. <translate> Near the top of the page you will see the search bar shown in the [[<tvar name=1>#screenshot</tvar>|Screenshot]] above.</translate>
*'''<translate> Search by Text</translate>'''. <translate> Enter part of the search term and click the Search icon. ''Hover'' to see a ''Tooltip'' indicating which fields will be searched.</translate>{{-}}<translate> To 'Search by ID' enter <tvar name=1>"id:x"</tvar>, where <tvar name=2>"x"</tvar> is the ID number (for example, <tvar name=3>"id:19"</tvar>).</translate>
*'''<translate> Filter Options</translate>'''. <translate> Click to display the additional filters.</translate>
*'''<translate> Clear</translate>'''. <translate> Click to clear the Filter field and restore the list to its unfiltered state.</translate>
*'''<translate> Ordering</translate>'''. <translate> Shows the current list ordering field. 2 ways to change the order:</translate>
**<translate> Select from the dropdown list. Ordering may be in ascending or descending order.</translate>
**<translate> Click a column heading. The column heading toggles between ascending and descending order.</translate>
*'''<translate> Number to Display</translate>'''. <translate> Shows the number of articles in a list. Select from the dropdown list to change the number displayed.</translate>{{-}}<translate> The default for a site is <tvar name=1>'20'</tvar> but this may be changed in the [[<tvar name=2>Help4.x:Site_Global_Configuration</tvar>/en<tvar name=3>#defaultlistlimit</tvar>|Global Configuration]].</translate>
<translate>

===Filter Options=== 


Near the top of the page you will see the filter bar shown in the [[<tvar name=1>#screenshot</tvar>|Screenshot]] above.</translate>
*'''<translate> Select Featured</translate>'''. <translate> Select from Unfeatured Articles / Featured Articles.</translate>
*'''<translate> Select Status</translate>'''. <translate> Select from Trashed / Unpublished / Published / Archived / All.</translate>
*'''<translate> Select Category</translate>'''. <translate> Select from the list of available categories.</translate>
*'''<translate> Select Access</translate>'''. <translate> Select from the list of available viewing access levels.</translate>
*'''<translate> Select Author</translate>'''. <translate> Select from the list of available authors.</translate>
*'''<translate> Select Language</translate>'''. <translate> Select from the list of available languages.</translate>
*'''<translate> Select Tag</translate>'''. <translate> Select from the list of available tags.</translate>
*'''<translate> Select Max Levels</translate>'''. <translate> Select from the list of available levels.</translate>
<translate>

===Pagination=== 
</translate>
'''<translate> Page Controls</translate>'''. <translate> When the number of articles is more than one page, you will see a page control bar near the bottom of the page shown in the [[<tvar name=1>#screenshot</tvar>|Screenshot]] above. The current page number being viewed has a dark colour background.</translate>
*'''<translate> Start</translate>'''. <translate> Click to go to the first page.</translate>
*'''<translate> Prev</translate>'''. <translate> Click to go to the previous page.</translate>
*'''<translate> Page numbers</translate>'''. <translate> Click to go to the desired page.</translate>
*'''<translate> Next</translate>'''. <translate> Click to go to the next page.</translate>
*'''<translate> End</translate>'''. <translate> Click to go to the last page.</translate>
<translate>

==Toolbar== 


At the top of the page you will see the toolbar shown in the [[<tvar name=1>#screenshot</tvar>|Screenshot]] above.</translate>
*'''<translate> New</translate>'''. <translate> Opens the editing screen to create a new article.</translate>
*'''<translate> Actions</translate>'''. <translate> Reveals a list of actions for selected articles. Check one or more articles checkboxes to activate the list.</translate>
**'''<translate> Publish</translate>'''. <translate> Makes the selected articles available to visitors to your website.</translate>
**'''<translate> Unpublish</translate>'''. <translate> Makes the selected articles unavailable to visitors to your website.</translate>
**'''<translate> Feature</translate>'''. <translate> Marks selected articles as featured.</translate>
**'''<translate> Unfeature</translate>'''. <translate> Changes the status of featured articles to unfeatured.</translate>
**'''<translate> Archive</translate>'''. <translate> Changes the status of the selected articles to indicate that they are archived.</translate> <translate> [[<tvar name=1>J4.x:How_to_Archive_an_Article</tvar>/en|Learn more.]]</translate>
**'''<translate> Check-in</translate>'''. <translate> Checks-in the selected articles.</translate>
**'''<translate> Trash</translate>'''. <translate> Changes the status of the selected articles to indicate that they are trashed.</translate> <translate> [[<tvar name=1>J4.x:Deleting_an_Article</tvar>/en|Learn more.]]</translate>
**'''<translate> Batch</translate>'''. <translate> Batch processes the selected articles.</translate>
*'''<translate> Options</translate>'''. <translate> Opens [[<tvar name=1>Help4.x:Articles:_Options</tvar>/en|Articles: Options]].</translate>
*'''<translate> Help</translate>'''. <translate> Opens this help screen.</translate>
<translate>

==Batch Process== 


The Batch Process allows a change in settings for a group of selected articles.</translate>

:[[File:Help-4x-batch-process-articles-<translate> en</translate>.png|600px]]

<translate>

'''How to Batch Process''' a group of articles:</translate>
# <translate> Select one or more articles on the list by checking the desired checkboxes.</translate>
# <translate> Click the Batch Toolbar button.</translate>
# <translate> Set one or more of the following values:</translate>
#* <translate> To change the '''Language''', select the desired new language from the Set Language list box.</translate>
#* <translate> To change the '''Access Levels''', select the desired new access level from the Set Access Level list box.</translate>
#* <translate> To change the '''Category''', select a category. To leave the category unchanged, use the default value of 'Select'.</translate>
#** <translate> To '''copy''' the articles to a different category, select the desired category from the category list box and check the Copy option. In this case, the original articles are unchanged and the copies are assigned to the new category and, if selected, the new language, access level, and tag.</translate>
#** <translate> To '''move''' the articles to a different category, select the desired category from the category list box and check the Move option. In this case, the original articles will be moved to a new category and, if selected, be assigned the new language, access level, and tag.</translate>
#* <translate> To add '''Tags''', select the desired Tags from the dropdown or choose to keep the tags currently added to the original articles.</translate>
# <translate> When all of the settings are entered, click on Process to perform the changes. A message '''"Batch process completed successfully."''' will show.</translate>
<translate>

==Quick Tips== 
</translate>
*<translate> If Joomla is installed without sample data, one article category called 'Uncategorised' is created automatically.</translate>
*<translate> To see trashed and archived articles, set the Status filter to 'All'.</translate>
*<translate> To change the ordering of articles within a category, click on the Ordering column heading to sort by this column. Also, it is easier to see the ordering if you filter on the desired category.</translate>
<translate>

==Related Information== 
</translate>
*<translate> [[<tvar name=1>Help4.x:Home_Dashboard</tvar>/en|Home Dashboard]]</translate>: <translate> Access to many default Joomla functions.</translate>{{:Chunk4x:Help_screen_related_Articles/<translate> en</translate>}}

{{Cathelp|4.0,4.1,4.2,4.3,4.4|Article Manager Help Screens|Content Help Screens}}

Plugin/Events

2023-08-06T10:40:48Z

Heelc29: translation

<noinclude><languages /></noinclude>
<noinclude>{{Joomla version|version=3.x|}}</noinclude>
{{-}}
<translate>
Joomla! ships with a variety of core events, organised into groups. These are described in the following topics.</translate>

<translate>
=== Api Authentication=== 
</translate>
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/ApiAuthentication#onUserAuthenticate|onUserAuthenticate]]

<translate>
=== Authentication === 
</translate>
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Authentication#onUserAuthenticate|onUserAuthenticate]]

<translate>
=== Behaviour === 
</translate>
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Behaviour#onTableObjectCreate|onTableObjectCreate]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Behaviour#onTableBeforeReset|onTableBeforeReset]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Behaviour#onTableAfterReset|onTableAfterReset]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Behaviour#onTableBeforeBind|onTableBeforeBind]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Behaviour#onTableAfterBind|onTableAfterBind]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Behaviour#onTableBeforeLoad|onTableBeforeLoad]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Behaviour#onTableAfterLoad|onTableAfterLoad]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Behaviour#onTableCheck|onTableCheck]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Behaviour#onTableBeforeBind|onTableBeforeBind]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Behaviour#onTableAfterBind|onTableAfterBind]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Behaviour#onTableBeforeStore|onTableBeforeStore]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Behaviour#onTableAfterStore|onTableAfterStore]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Behaviour#onTableBeforeDelete|onTableBeforeDelete]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Behaviour#onTableAfterDelete|onTableAfterDelete]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Behaviour#onTableBeforeCheckout|onTableBeforeCheckout]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Behaviour#onTableAfterCheckout|onTableAfterCheckout]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Behaviour#onTableBeforeCheckin|onTableBeforeCheckin]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Behaviour#onTableAfterCheckin|onTableAfterCheckin]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Behaviour#onTableBeforeHit|onTableBeforeHit]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Behaviour#onTableAfterHit|onTableAfterHit]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Behaviour#onTableBeforeReorder|onTableBeforeReorder]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Behaviour#onTableAfterReorder|onTableAfterReorder]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Behaviour#onTableBeforeMove|onTableBeforeMove]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Behaviour#onTableAfterMove|onTableAfterMove]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Behaviour#onTableBeforePublish|onTableBeforePublish]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Behaviour#onTableAfterPublish|onTableAfterPublish]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Behaviour#onTableSetNewTags|onTableSetNewTags]]

<translate>
=== Captcha === 
</translate>
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Captcha#onInit|onInit]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Captcha#onDisplay|onDisplay]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Captcha#onCheckAnswer|onCheckAnswer]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Captcha#onPrivacyCollectAdminCapabilities|onPrivacyCollectAdminCapabilities]]

<translate>
=== Content === 
</translate>
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Content#onContentPrepare|onContentPrepare]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Content#onContentAfterTitle|onContentAfterTitle]] ({{JVer|3.0}} <translate> and higher</translate>)
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Content#onContentBeforeDisplay|onContentBeforeDisplay]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Content#onContentAfterDisplay|onContentAfterDisplay]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Content#onContentBeforeSave|onContentBeforeSave]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Content#onContentAfterSave|onContentAfterSave]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Content#onContentPrepareForm|onContentPrepareForm]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Content#onContentPrepareData|onContentPrepareData]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Content#onContentBeforeDelete|onContentBeforeDelete]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Content#onContentAfterDelete|onContentAfterDelete]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Content#onContentChangeState|onContentChangeState]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Content#onContentSearch|onContentSearch]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Content#onContentSearchAreas|onContentSearchAreas]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Content#onUserBeforeDataValidation|onUserBeforeDataValidation]] (N.B. Whilst this event starts with user it's misleading - it applies to all actions and is renamed to a better name of ''onContentValidateData'' in {{JVer|4.0}})

<translate>
=== Editors === 
</translate>
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Editor#onInit|onInit]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Editor#onSave|onSave]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Editor#onSetContent|onSetContent]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Editor#onDisplay|onDisplay]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Editor#onGetContent|onGetContent]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Editor#onGetInsertMethod|onGetInsertMethod]]

<translate>
=== Editors-xtd === 
</translate>
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Editor-xtd#onDisplay|onDisplay]]

<translate>
=== Extensions === 
</translate>
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Extension#onExtensionAfterInstall|onExtensionAfterInstall]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Extension#onExtensionAfterUninstall|onExtensionAfterUninstall]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Extension#onExtensionAfterUpdate|onExtensionAfterUpdate]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Extension#onExtensionAfterUpdate|onExtensionBeforeSave]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Extension#onExtensionAfterUpdate|onExtensionAfterSave]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Extension#onExtensionAfterDelete|onExtensionAfterDelete]]

<translate>
=== Fields === 
</translate>
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Fields#onCustomFieldsPrepareDom|onCustomFieldsPrepareDom]]

<translate>
=== Filesystem === 
</translate>
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Filesystem#onSetupProviders|onSetupProviders]]

<translate>
=== Finder === 
</translate>
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Finder#onFinderCategoryChangeState|onFinderCategoryChangeState]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Finder#onFinderChangeState|onFinderChangeState]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Finder#onFinderBeforeDelete|onFinderAfterDelete]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Finder#onFinderAfterDelete|onFinderAfterDelete]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Finder#onFinderBeforeSave|onFinderBeforeSave]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Finder#onFinderAfterSave|onFinderAfterSave]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Finder#onFinderResult|onFinderResult]] {{JVer|4.0}}
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Finder#onPrepareFinderContent|onPrepareFinderContent]]

<translate>
=== Installer === 
</translate>
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Installer#onInstallerAddInstallationTab|onInstallerAddInstallationTab]]

<translate>
=== Media Action === 
</translate>
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Media-Action#onContentBeforeSave|onContentBeforeSave]]

<translate>
=== Privacy === 
</translate>
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Privacy#onPrivacyCanRemoveData|onPrivacyCanRemoveData]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Privacy#onPrivacyExportRequest|onPrivacyExportRequest]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Privacy#onPrivacyRemoveData|onPrivacyRemoveData]]

<translate>
=== Quick Icons === 
</translate>
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Quickicon#onGetIcons|onGetIcons]]

<translate>
=== Sampledata === 
</translate>
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/SampleData#onSampledataGetOverview|onSampledataGetOverview]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/SampleData#onAjaxSampledataApplyStep1|onAjaxSampledataApplyStep1]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/SampleData#onAjaxSampledataApplyStep2|onAjaxSampledataApplyStep2]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/SampleData#onAjaxSampledataApplyStep3|onAjaxSampledataApplyStep3]]

<translate>
=== Schemaorg === 
</translate>
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Schemaorg#onSchemaBeforeCompileHead|onSchemaBeforeCompileHead]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Schemaorg#onSchemaPrepareData|onSchemaPrepareData]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Schemaorg#onSchemaPrepareForm|onSchemaPrepareForm]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Schemaorg#onSchemaPrepareSave|onSchemaPrepareSave]]

<translate>
=== System === 
</translate>
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/System#onAfterInitialise|onAfterInitialise]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/System#onAfterRoute|onAfterRoute]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/System#onAfterDispatch|onAfterDispatch]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/System#onAfterRender|onAfterRender]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/System#onBeforeRender|onBeforeRender]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/System#onBeforeCompileHead|onBeforeCompileHead]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/System#onAfterSessionStart|onAfterSessionStart]]

<translate>
=== User === 
</translate>
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/User#onUserAuthorisation|onUserAuthorisation]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/User#onUserAuthorisationFailure|onUserAuthorisationFailure]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/User#onUserBeforeSave|onUserBeforeSave]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/User#onUserAfterSave|onUserAfterSave]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/User#onUserBeforeDelete|onUserBeforeDelete]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/User#onUserAfterDelete|onUserAfterDelete]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/User#onUserLogin|onUserLogin]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/User#onUserLoginFailure|onUserLoginFailure]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/User#onUserAfterLogin|onUserAfterLogin]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/User#onUserLogout|onUserLogout]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/User#onUserBeforeSaveGroup|onUserBeforeSaveGroup]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/User#onUserAfterSaveGroup|onUserAfterSaveGroup]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/User#onUserBeforeDeleteGroup|onUserBeforeDeleteGroup]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/User#onUserAfterDeleteGroup|onUserAfterDeleteGroup]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/User#onUserAfterRemind|onUserAfterRemind]]

<translate>
=== Web Services === 
</translate>
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/WebServices#onBeforeApiRoute|onBeforeApiRoute]]

<translate>
=== Workflow === 
</translate>
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Workflow#onWorkflowBeforeTransition|onWorkflowBeforeTransition]]

<translate>
=== Other Core Component Events === </translate>

<translate>
==== Actionlog Component ==== 
</translate>
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Actionlog#onAfterLogPurge|onAfterLogPurge]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Actionlog#onAfterLogExport|onAfterLogExport]]

<translate>
==== Cache Component ==== 
</translate>
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Cache#onAfterPurge|onAfterPurge]]

<translate>
==== Checkin Component ==== 
</translate>
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Checkin#onAfterCheckin|onAfterCheckin]]

<translate>
==== Config Component ==== 
</translate>
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Config#onApplicationAfterSave|onApplicationAfterSave]]

<translate>
==== Contact Component ==== 
</translate>
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Contact#onValidateContact|onValidateContact]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Contact#onSubmitContact|onSubmitContact]]

<translate>
==== Installer Component ==== 
</translate>
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Install#onInstallerBeforeInstallation|onInstallerBeforeInstallation]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Install#onInstallerBeforeInstaller|onInstallerBeforeInstaller]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Install#onInstallerAfterInstaller|onInstallerAfterInstaller]]

<translate>
==== Menu Component ==== 
</translate>
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Menu#onAfterGetMenuTypeOptions|onAfterGetMenuTypeOptions]]

<translate>
==== Module ==== 
</translate>
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Module#onRenderModule|onRenderModule]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Module#onAfterRenderModule|onAfterRenderModule]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Module#onAfterRenderModules|onAfterRenderModules]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Module#onPrepareModuleList|onPrepareModuleList]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Module#onAfterModuleList|onAfterModuleList]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Module#onAfterCleanModuleList|onAfterCleanModuleList]]

<noinclude>
[[Category:Plugin Development|Events{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Specifications{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Tutorials{{#translation:}}]]
</noinclude>

Plugin/Events

2023-08-06T10:38:50Z

Heelc29: schemaorg events added

<noinclude><languages /></noinclude>
<noinclude>{{Joomla version|version=3.x|}}</noinclude>
{{-}}
<translate>
Joomla! ships with a variety of core events, organised into groups. These are described in the following topics.</translate>

<translate>
=== Api Authentication=== 
</translate>
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/ApiAuthentication#onUserAuthenticate|onUserAuthenticate]]

<translate>
=== Authentication === 
</translate>
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Authentication#onUserAuthenticate|onUserAuthenticate]]

<translate>
=== Behaviour === 
</translate>
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Behaviour#onTableObjectCreate|onTableObjectCreate]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Behaviour#onTableBeforeReset|onTableBeforeReset]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Behaviour#onTableAfterReset|onTableAfterReset]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Behaviour#onTableBeforeBind|onTableBeforeBind]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Behaviour#onTableAfterBind|onTableAfterBind]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Behaviour#onTableBeforeLoad|onTableBeforeLoad]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Behaviour#onTableAfterLoad|onTableAfterLoad]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Behaviour#onTableCheck|onTableCheck]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Behaviour#onTableBeforeBind|onTableBeforeBind]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Behaviour#onTableAfterBind|onTableAfterBind]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Behaviour#onTableBeforeStore|onTableBeforeStore]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Behaviour#onTableAfterStore|onTableAfterStore]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Behaviour#onTableBeforeDelete|onTableBeforeDelete]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Behaviour#onTableAfterDelete|onTableAfterDelete]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Behaviour#onTableBeforeCheckout|onTableBeforeCheckout]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Behaviour#onTableAfterCheckout|onTableAfterCheckout]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Behaviour#onTableBeforeCheckin|onTableBeforeCheckin]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Behaviour#onTableAfterCheckin|onTableAfterCheckin]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Behaviour#onTableBeforeHit|onTableBeforeHit]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Behaviour#onTableAfterHit|onTableAfterHit]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Behaviour#onTableBeforeReorder|onTableBeforeReorder]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Behaviour#onTableAfterReorder|onTableAfterReorder]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Behaviour#onTableBeforeMove|onTableBeforeMove]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Behaviour#onTableAfterMove|onTableAfterMove]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Behaviour#onTableBeforePublish|onTableBeforePublish]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Behaviour#onTableAfterPublish|onTableAfterPublish]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Behaviour#onTableSetNewTags|onTableSetNewTags]]

<translate>
=== Captcha === 
</translate>
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Captcha#onInit|onInit]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Captcha#onDisplay|onDisplay]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Captcha#onCheckAnswer|onCheckAnswer]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Captcha#onPrivacyCollectAdminCapabilities|onPrivacyCollectAdminCapabilities]]

<translate>
=== Content === 
</translate>
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Content#onContentPrepare|onContentPrepare]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Content#onContentAfterTitle|onContentAfterTitle]] ({{JVer|3.0}} <translate> and higher</translate>)
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Content#onContentBeforeDisplay|onContentBeforeDisplay]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Content#onContentAfterDisplay|onContentAfterDisplay]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Content#onContentBeforeSave|onContentBeforeSave]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Content#onContentAfterSave|onContentAfterSave]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Content#onContentPrepareForm|onContentPrepareForm]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Content#onContentPrepareData|onContentPrepareData]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Content#onContentBeforeDelete|onContentBeforeDelete]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Content#onContentAfterDelete|onContentAfterDelete]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Content#onContentChangeState|onContentChangeState]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Content#onContentSearch|onContentSearch]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Content#onContentSearchAreas|onContentSearchAreas]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Content#onUserBeforeDataValidation|onUserBeforeDataValidation]] (N.B. Whilst this event starts with user it's misleading - it applies to all actions and is renamed to a better name of ''onContentValidateData'' in {{JVer|4.0}})

<translate>
=== Editors === 
</translate>
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Editor#onInit|onInit]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Editor#onSave|onSave]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Editor#onSetContent|onSetContent]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Editor#onDisplay|onDisplay]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Editor#onGetContent|onGetContent]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Editor#onGetInsertMethod|onGetInsertMethod]]

<translate>
=== Editors-xtd === 
</translate>
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Editor-xtd#onDisplay|onDisplay]]

<translate>
=== Extensions === 
</translate>
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Extension#onExtensionAfterInstall|onExtensionAfterInstall]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Extension#onExtensionAfterUninstall|onExtensionAfterUninstall]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Extension#onExtensionAfterUpdate|onExtensionAfterUpdate]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Extension#onExtensionAfterUpdate|onExtensionBeforeSave]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Extension#onExtensionAfterUpdate|onExtensionAfterSave]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Extension#onExtensionAfterDelete|onExtensionAfterDelete]]

<translate>
=== Fields === 
</translate>
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Fields#onCustomFieldsPrepareDom|onCustomFieldsPrepareDom]]

<translate>
=== Filesystem === 
</translate>
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Filesystem#onSetupProviders|onSetupProviders]]

<translate>
=== Finder === 
</translate>
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Finder#onFinderCategoryChangeState|onFinderCategoryChangeState]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Finder#onFinderChangeState|onFinderChangeState]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Finder#onFinderBeforeDelete|onFinderAfterDelete]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Finder#onFinderAfterDelete|onFinderAfterDelete]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Finder#onFinderBeforeSave|onFinderBeforeSave]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Finder#onFinderAfterSave|onFinderAfterSave]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Finder#onFinderResult|onFinderResult]] {{JVer|4.0}}
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Finder#onPrepareFinderContent|onPrepareFinderContent]]

<translate>
=== Installer === 
</translate>
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Installer#onInstallerAddInstallationTab|onInstallerAddInstallationTab]]

<translate>
=== Media Action === 
</translate>
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Media-Action#onContentBeforeSave|onContentBeforeSave]]

<translate>
=== Privacy === 
</translate>
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Privacy#onPrivacyCanRemoveData|onPrivacyCanRemoveData]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Privacy#onPrivacyExportRequest|onPrivacyExportRequest]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Privacy#onPrivacyRemoveData|onPrivacyRemoveData]]

<translate>
=== Quick Icons === 
</translate>
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Quickicon#onGetIcons|onGetIcons]]

<translate>
=== Sampledata === 
</translate>
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/SampleData#onSampledataGetOverview|onSampledataGetOverview]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/SampleData#onAjaxSampledataApplyStep1|onAjaxSampledataApplyStep1]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/SampleData#onAjaxSampledataApplyStep2|onAjaxSampledataApplyStep2]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/SampleData#onAjaxSampledataApplyStep3|onAjaxSampledataApplyStep3]]

<translate>
=== Schemaorg ===
</translate>
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Schemaorg#onSchemaBeforeCompileHead|onSchemaBeforeCompileHead]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Schemaorg#onSchemaPrepareData|onSchemaPrepareData]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Schemaorg#onSchemaPrepareForm|onSchemaPrepareForm]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Schemaorg#onSchemaPrepareSave|onSchemaPrepareSave]]

<translate>
=== System === 
</translate>
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/System#onAfterInitialise|onAfterInitialise]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/System#onAfterRoute|onAfterRoute]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/System#onAfterDispatch|onAfterDispatch]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/System#onAfterRender|onAfterRender]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/System#onBeforeRender|onBeforeRender]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/System#onBeforeCompileHead|onBeforeCompileHead]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/System#onAfterSessionStart|onAfterSessionStart]]

<translate>
=== User === 
</translate>
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/User#onUserAuthorisation|onUserAuthorisation]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/User#onUserAuthorisationFailure|onUserAuthorisationFailure]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/User#onUserBeforeSave|onUserBeforeSave]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/User#onUserAfterSave|onUserAfterSave]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/User#onUserBeforeDelete|onUserBeforeDelete]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/User#onUserAfterDelete|onUserAfterDelete]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/User#onUserLogin|onUserLogin]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/User#onUserLoginFailure|onUserLoginFailure]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/User#onUserAfterLogin|onUserAfterLogin]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/User#onUserLogout|onUserLogout]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/User#onUserBeforeSaveGroup|onUserBeforeSaveGroup]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/User#onUserAfterSaveGroup|onUserAfterSaveGroup]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/User#onUserBeforeDeleteGroup|onUserBeforeDeleteGroup]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/User#onUserAfterDeleteGroup|onUserAfterDeleteGroup]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/User#onUserAfterRemind|onUserAfterRemind]]

<translate>
=== Web Services === 
</translate>
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/WebServices#onBeforeApiRoute|onBeforeApiRoute]]

<translate>
=== Workflow === 
</translate>
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Workflow#onWorkflowBeforeTransition|onWorkflowBeforeTransition]]

<translate>
=== Other Core Component Events === </translate>

<translate>
==== Actionlog Component ==== 
</translate>
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Actionlog#onAfterLogPurge|onAfterLogPurge]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Actionlog#onAfterLogExport|onAfterLogExport]]

<translate>
==== Cache Component ==== 
</translate>
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Cache#onAfterPurge|onAfterPurge]]

<translate>
==== Checkin Component ==== 
</translate>
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Checkin#onAfterCheckin|onAfterCheckin]]

<translate>
==== Config Component ==== 
</translate>
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Config#onApplicationAfterSave|onApplicationAfterSave]]

<translate>
==== Contact Component ==== 
</translate>
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Contact#onValidateContact|onValidateContact]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Contact#onSubmitContact|onSubmitContact]]

<translate>
==== Installer Component ==== 
</translate>
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Install#onInstallerBeforeInstallation|onInstallerBeforeInstallation]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Install#onInstallerBeforeInstaller|onInstallerBeforeInstaller]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Install#onInstallerAfterInstaller|onInstallerAfterInstaller]]

<translate>
==== Menu Component ==== 
</translate>
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Menu#onAfterGetMenuTypeOptions|onAfterGetMenuTypeOptions]]

<translate>
==== Module ==== 
</translate>
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Module#onRenderModule|onRenderModule]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Module#onAfterRenderModule|onAfterRenderModule]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Module#onAfterRenderModules|onAfterRenderModules]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Module#onPrepareModuleList|onPrepareModuleList]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Module#onAfterModuleList|onAfterModuleList]]
* [[S:MyLanguage/Plugin/Events/Module#onAfterCleanModuleList|onAfterCleanModuleList]]

<noinclude>
[[Category:Plugin Development|Events{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Specifications{{#translation:}}]]
[[Category:Tutorials{{#translation:}}]]
</noinclude>

Help4.x:Extensions: Update Sites

2023-04-19T16:33:50Z

Heelc29: help categories

<noinclude><languages /></noinclude>
<translate>

==Description== 
</translate>
<translate>

A list of sites from which Joomla! Extensions can be updated on-line.</translate>
<translate>

==How to Access== 
</translate>
<translate>

* Select {{rarr|System,Update panel,Update Sites}} from the Administrator menu.</translate>
<translate>

==Screenshot== 
</translate>
[[Image:Help-4x-Extensions-Update-Sites-screen-<translate> en</translate>.png|800px]]
<translate>

==Column Headers== 
</translate>
<translate>

Click on the title of a column header to sort by that column. The purpose of each column is as follows:</translate>
<translate>

* '''Checkbox.''' Check this box to select one or more items. To select all items, check the box in the column heading. After one or more boxes are checked, click a toolbar button to take an action on the selected item or items.</translate>
<translate>

* '''Status.''' The status of this item (Enabled or Disabled).</translate>
<translate>

* '''Update Site.''' The URL of the update source site.</translate>
<translate>

* '''Name.''' The name of the Extension.</translate>
<translate>

* '''Location.''' Site or Administrator Extension</translate>
<translate>

* '''Type.''' Package, Component, File...</translate>
<translate>

* '''Folder.''' ...</translate>
<translate>

* '''ID.''' This is a unique identification number for this action assigned automatically by Joomla. It is used to identify the item internally, and you cannot change this number.</translate>
<translate>

==List Filters== 
</translate>
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_filters_Search_Bar_Filter/<translate>

en</translate>}}

<translate>

'''Filter Options'''</translate>
{{Chunk4x:Help_screen_filters_Status/<translate>

en</translate>}}
<translate>

* '''Location.''' The intended destination of the extension: Site, Administrator or API.</translate>
<translate>

* '''Type.''' Select from the list: Component, File, etc.</translate>
<translate>

* '''Folder.''' Select from the list: actionlog, api-authentication, etc.</translate>
<translate>

* '''Download Key.''' Used by commercial extensions to allow download access.</translate>
{{Chunk4x:Help_screen_filters_Pagination/<translate>

en</translate>}}
<translate>

==Toolbar== 
</translate>
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_top_descriptor/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Edit/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Actions/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Enable/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Disable/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Delete/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Checkin/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Rebuild/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Options/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Help/<translate>

en</translate>}}

{{Cathelp|4.0,4.1,4.2,4.3|User Manager Help Screens}}

Help4.x:Workflows List

2023-03-31T16:17:22Z

Heelc29: Help screen Category

<noinclude><languages /></noinclude>
<translate>
==Description== 
</translate>
<translate>

The Publishing Workflow component is used to replace static states (unpublished, published, trashed and archived) with a more generic approach. This way you can easily create a customized workflow to manage your articles within a component.</translate>

<translate>

For more information see the [[J4.x:Workflow/en|Workflow Tutorial]].</translate>

<translate>

==How To Access== 
</translate>
<translate>

*Enable Workflows in {{rarr|Content,Articles,Options,Integration Tab}} from the Administrator menu. Then...</translate>
<translate>

**Select {{rarr|Content,Workflows}} in the Administrator menu.</translate>

<translate>
==Screenshot== 
</translate>

[[Image:Help-4x-components-workflows-list-<translate>

en</translate>.png|800px]]

<translate>
==Column Headings== 
</translate>
<translate>

Click on the column heading to sort the list by that column's value.</translate>
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Checkbox/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Ordering/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Status/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Name/<translate>

en</translate>}}
<translate>

*'''Default.''' If there is more than one workflow. Select to set the default.</translate>
<translate>

*'''Stages.''' The number of stages in the workflow. Select to view the stages list.</translate>
<translate>

*'''Transition.''' The number of transitions. Select to view the transitions list.</translate>
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Id/<translate>

en</translate>}}

<translate>

==List Filters== 
</translate>

{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_filters_Search_Bar_Filter/<translate>

en</translate>}}
<translate>

'''Filter Options'''
</translate>
<translate>

*'''Filter by published status.''' </translate>

<translate>
==Toolbar== </translate>
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_top_descriptor/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Actions/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Enable/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Disable/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Default/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Checkin/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Trash/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Options/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Help/<translate>

en</translate>}}

{{Cathelp|4.0,4.1,4.2,4.3|Content Help Screens|Components Help Screens}}

Help4.x:Transitions List: Basic Workflow

2023-03-31T16:16:51Z

Heelc29: Help screen Category

<noinclude><languages /></noinclude>
<translate>
==Description== 
</translate>
<translate>

The Publishing Workflow component is used to replace static states (unpublished, published, trashed and archived) with a more generic approach. This way you can easily create a customized workflow to manage your articles within a component.</translate>

<translate>

For more information see the [[J4.x:Workflow/en|Workflow Tutorial]].</translate>

<translate>

==How To Access== 
</translate>
<translate>

*Enable Workflows in {{rarr|Content,Articles,Options,Integration Tab}} from the Administrator menu. Then...</translate>
<translate>

**Select {{rarr|Content,Workflows}} in the Administrator menu. Then ...</translate>
<translate>

***Select the numbered button in the '''Transitions''' columns.</translate>

<translate>

==Screenshot== 
</translate>

[[Image:Help-4x-components-workflows-transitions-list-<translate>

en</translate>.png|800px]]

<translate>
==Column Headings== 
</translate>
<translate>

Click on the column heading to sort the list by that column's value.</translate>
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Checkbox/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Ordering/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Status/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Name/<translate>

en</translate>}}
<translate>

*'''Current Stage.''' Default is All.</translate>
<translate>

*'''Target Stage.''' Default is Basic Stage.</translate>
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Id/<translate>

en</translate>}}

<translate>
==List Filters== 
</translate>

{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_filters_Search_Bar_Filter/<translate>

en</translate>}}
<translate>

'''Filter Options'''
</translate>
<translate>

*'''Filter by Status.''' </translate>
<translate>

*'''Filter by Current Stage.''' </translate>
<translate>

*'''Filter by Target Stage.''' </translate>

==Toolbar==
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_top_descriptor/<translate>

en</translate>}}
<translate>

*'''Back.''' Go back to the previous page.</translate>
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_New/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Actions/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Enable/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Disable/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Default/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Checkin/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Trash/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Options/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Help/<translate>

en</translate>}}

{{Cathelp|4.0,4.1,4.2,4.3|Content Help Screens|Components Help Screens}}

Help4.x:Stages List: Basic Workflow

2023-03-31T16:16:21Z

Heelc29: Help screen Category

<noinclude><languages /></noinclude>
<translate>
==Description== 
</translate>
<translate>

The Publishing Workflow component is used to replace static states (unpublished, published, trashed and archived) with a more generic approach. This way you can easily create a customized workflow to manage your articles within a component.</translate>

<translate>

For more information see the [[J4.x:Workflow/en|Workflow Tutorial]].</translate>

<translate>
==How To Access== 
</translate>
<translate>

*Enable Workflows in {{rarr|Content,Articles,Options,Integration Tab}} from the Administrator menu. Then...</translate>
<translate>

**Select {{rarr|Content,Workflows}} in the Administrator menu. Then ...</translate>
<translate>

**Select the numbered Stage button. Then...</translate>
<translate>

***Select the New button to create a new stage. Or...</translate>
<translate>

***Select an item in the Name column to edit an existing stage.</translate>

<translate>
==Screenshot== 
</translate>

[[Image:Help-4x-components-workflows-stages-list-<translate>

en</translate>.png|800px]]

<translate>
==Column Headings== 
</translate>
<translate>

Click on the column heading to sort the list by that column's value.</translate>
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Checkbox/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Ordering/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Status/<translate>

en</translate>}}
<translate>

*'''Default.''' If there is more than one workflow. Select to set the default.</translate>
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Name/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Id/<translate>

en</translate>}}

<translate>
==List Filters== 
</translate>

{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_filters_Search_Bar_Filter/<translate>

en</translate>}}
<translate>

'''Filter Options'''
</translate>
<translate>

*'''Filter by published status.''' </translate>

==Toolbar==
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_top_descriptor/<translate>

en</translate>}}
<translate>

*'''Back.''' Go back to the previous page.</translate>
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_New/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Actions/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Enable/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Disable/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Default/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Checkin/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Trash/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Options/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Help/<translate>

en</translate>}}

{{Cathelp|4.0,4.1,4.2,4.3|Content Help Screens|Components Help Screens}}

Help4.x:Smart Search: Search Term Analysis

2023-03-31T16:15:23Z

Heelc29: Help screen Category

<noinclude><languages /></noinclude>

<translate>
==Description== 
</translate>

<translate>

Displays a list of phrases used by site visitors for site searching. The Smart Search component Option - '''Gather Search Statistics''' needs to be set to '''Yes''' to allow statistics to be collected.</translate>
<translate>
==How to Access== 
</translate>

<translate>

*Select {{rarr|Components,SmartSearch,Statistics}} from the Administrator menu.</translate>

<translate>
==Screenshot== 
</translate>

[[Image:Help-4x-Component-Smart-Search-Searches-screen-<translate>

en</translate>.png|800px]]

<translate>
==Columns== 
</translate>

<translate>

*'''Search Phrase.''' The search term entered by the site user.</translate>
<translate>

*'''Hits.''' The number of times this term has been used.</translate>
<translate>

*'''Results.''' The number of items resulting from the search.</translate>

<translate>
==Toolbar== 
</translate>

{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_top_descriptor/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Reset/<translate>

en</translate>}}

{{Cathelp|4.0,4.1,4.2,4.3|Smart Search|Components Help Screens}}

Help4.x:Permissions for Group

2023-03-31T16:14:17Z

Heelc29:

<noinclude><languages /></noinclude>
<translate>

==Description== 
</translate>
<translate>
The Advanced Permissions Report maps out the exact permissions for any given user group across all assets on your Joomla! installation. It is useful for debugging user access problems.</translate>
<translate>

==How to access== 
</translate>
<translate>
* Select '''Users → Groups''' from the Administrator menu. Then...</translate>
<translate>

** Select the '''Permissions''' icon for a specific group from the user groups list.</translate>
<translate>

==Screenshot== 
</translate>
[[Image:Help-4x-debug_groups-screen-<translate>

en</translate>.png|800px]]
<translate>

==Column Headers== 
</translate>
<translate>
In the table containing the assets from your Joomla! site, you will see different columns. For each asset the permission for this group is shown, color coded as per legend.</translate>
<translate>
*'''Asset Title.''' The asset as we know it.</translate>
<translate>
*'''Asset Name.''' The asset as known internally.</translate>
<translate>
*'''Site Login.''' Allows users in the group to login to the Frontend site.</translate>
<translate>
*'''Administrator Login.''' Allows users in the group to login to the Backend Administrator site.</translate>
<translate>
*'''Web Services Login.''' Allows utilization of the Joomla Web Services API via a Super User API Token.</translate>
<translate>
*'''Offline Access.''' Allows users in the group to access the Frontend site when site is offline.</translate>
<translate>
*'''Super User.''' Allows users in the group to perform any action over the whole site regardless of any other permission settings.</translate>
*<translate> '''Configure Options Only.''' Allows users in the group to edit the options (except permissions) of any extension.</translate>
<translate>
*'''Access Administration Interface.''' Allows users in the group to access all of the administration interface except Global Configuration.</translate>
<translate>
*'''Create.''' Allows users in the group to create any content in any extension.</translate>
<translate>
*'''Delete.''' Allows users in the group to delete any content in any extension.</translate>
<translate>
*'''Edit.''' Allows users in the group to edit any content in any extension.</translate>
<translate>
*'''Edit State.''' Allows users in the group to edit the state of any content in any extension.</translate>
<translate>
*'''Edit Own.''' Allows users in the group to edit any content they own in any extension.</translate>
<translate>

*'''Edit Custom Field Value.''' Allows users in the group to edit any value of custom fields submitted in any extension.</translate>
<translate>
*'''LFT.''' The left and right values in the hierarchy. See [[Using_nested_sets|Using nested sets]] in English.</translate>
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Id/<translate>

en</translate>}}
<translate>

==List Filters== 
</translate>
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_filter_bar_top_descriptor/<translate>

en</translate>}}
<translate>

*'''Search'''. Enter part of the asset name and press the Search icon to find matching assets. Press '''x''' or Clear to clear the search field and restore the list of assets.</translate>
<translate>
*'''Component'''. Filter by any installed component in Joomla.</translate>
<translate>
*'''Start Level'''. Start level of the item.</translate>
<translate>

*'''End Level'''. End level of the item.</translate>
{{:Chunk4x:Help_screen_filters_Pagination/<translate>

en</translate>}}
<translate>

==Toolbar== 
</translate>
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_top_descriptor/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Close/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Options/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Help/<translate>

en</translate>}}
<translate>

==Legend== 
</translate>
<translate>

At the bottom you will see the legend:</translate>

[[Image:Help31-Help-Permissions-Report-Legend-<translate>

en</translate>.png]]

<translate>

*'''Not Allowed'''. Action not allowed.</translate>
<translate>

*'''Allowed'''. Action allowed.</translate>
<translate>

*'''Forbidden'''. Action forbidden.</translate>
<translate>

==Related Information== 
</translate>
* <translate> [[Help4.x:Site_Global_Configuration/en|Global Configuration</translate>]]

{{Cathelp|4.0,4.1,4.2,4.3|Users Debug Users|Users Debug Permissions}}

Help4.x:Edit Update Site

2023-03-31T16:13:37Z

Heelc29: Help screen Category

<noinclude><languages /></noinclude>
<translate>

==Description== 
</translate>
<translate>

The Edit Update Site screen shows some information about the update site. The Joomla! sources cannot be edited but other sources may allow editing.</translate>
<translate>

==How to access== 
</translate>
<translate>

* Select {{rarr|System,Update panel,Update Sites}} from the Administrator menu. Then...</translate>
<translate>

** Select a Title link in the Update Site column.</translate>
<translate>

==Screenshot== 
</translate>
[[Image:Help-4x-edit-update-site-screenshot-<translate>

en</translate>.png|800px]]
<translate>

==Form Fields== 
</translate>
<translate>

* '''Name.''' The name of the site.</translate>
<translate>

* '''Type.''' The type of site.</translate>
<translate>

* '''Location.''' The URL of the XML file controlling the update.</translate>
<translate>

==Toolbar== 
</translate>
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_top_descriptor/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Save/<translate>

en</translate>|user}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_SaveAndClose/<translate>

en</translate>|user}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Close/<translate>

en</translate>}}
{{safesubst:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Help/<translate>

en</translate>}}

{{Cathelp|4.0,4.1,4.2,4.3}}

Help4.x:Field Groups: Edit

2023-03-31T16:04:23Z

Heelc29: Category Help screen

<noinclude><languages /></noinclude>
<translate>

==Description== 


Field Groups are used to collect related fields under a named Tab in a data entry form.


The helpscreen show as example Contacts.

==How to Access== 


{{<tvar name=1>rarr</tvar>|Components,Contacts,Field Groups}}


To add a Field Group:</translate>
#<translate> select from the dropdown list:</translate>
#*<translate> Contact</translate>
#*<translate> Mail</translate>
#*<translate> Category</translate>
#<translate> click the '''New''' toolbar button</translate>
<translate> To edit a Field Group:</translate>
*<translate> Select a '''Title''' from the list</translate>
{{anchor|screenshot}}
<translate>

==Screenshot== 
</translate>
:[[File:Help-4x-Field-Groups-Edit-screen-<translate> en</translate>.png|800px|none]]
<translate>

==Form Fields== 
</translate>
*<translate> '''Title'''. The Title for this field group.</translate>
<translate>

===General=== 


'''Left Panel'''</translate>
*<translate> '''Description'''.</translate> <translate> The description of the field group. A text that will be shown as a tool tip when the user moves the mouse over the text box while he use it in the Backend creating an article or a contact or a third party component that supports custom fields. This text is not translatable. You do not see this description in the Frontend.</translate>
<translate> '''Right Panel'''</translate>
*<translate> '''Status'''.</translate> <translate> The published status of this field group.</translate>
**<translate> Published:</translate> <translate> The field group is visible while editing an article or an contact. And it is visible in the Frontend.</translate>
**<translate> Unpublished:</translate> <translate> The field group will not be visible to users while editing an article or an contact.</translate>
**<translate> Archived:</translate> <translate> The field group will no longer show on edition an article or an contact. You can open it in [[<tvar name=1>Help4.x:Field_Groups</tvar>/en<tvar name=2>#selectstatus</tvar>|Field Groups]] when you set the filter to archived.</translate>
**<translate> Trashed:</translate> <translate> The field group is deleted but still in the database. It can be permanently deleted from the database in [[<tvar name=1>Help4.x:Field_Groups</tvar>/en<tvar name=2>#selectstatus</tvar>|Field Groups]] with the Empty Trash function.</translate> <translate> [[<tvar name=1>J4.x:Deleting_an_Article</tvar>/en|Learn more.]]</translate>
*<translate> '''Access'''.</translate> <translate> Select the viewing access level for this field group. The access levels depend on what has been set up in [[<tvar name=1>Help4.x:Users:_Viewing_Access_Levels</tvar>/en|Users: Access Levels]].</translate>
*<translate> '''Language'''.</translate> <translate> Select the language for this field group. If you are not using the [[<tvar name=1>Help4.x:Extensions:_Languages</tvar>/en|multi-language feature]] of Joomla, keep the default of 'All'.</translate>
*<translate> '''Note'''.</translate> <translate> An optional field to make your personal notes for the field group.</translate>
<translate>

===Publishing=== 
</translate>
:[[File:Help-4x-Field-Groups-Edit-publishing-subscreen-<translate> en</translate>.png|600px|none]]
*<translate> '''Created Date'''.</translate> <translate> The current time when the field group was created. Enter in a different date and time or click on the calendar icon to find the desired date.</translate>
*<translate> '''Created By'''.</translate> <translate> Name of the User who created this field group. This will default to the currently logged-in user. If you want to change this to a different user, click the Select User button.</translate>
*<translate> '''Modified Date'''.</translate> <translate> Date of last modification.</translate>
*<translate> '''Modified By'''.</translate> <translate> Username who performed the last modification.</translate>
*<translate> '''ID'''.</translate> <translate> A unique identification number for this field group, you cannot change this number. When creating a new field group, this field group displays <tvar name=1>"0"</tvar> until you save the new entry.</translate>
<translate>

===Options=== 
</translate>
:[[File:Help-4x-Field-Groups-Edit-options-subscreen-<translate> en</translate>.png|600px|none]]
*<translate> '''Display When Read-Only'''.</translate> <translate> If the field group is read only (perhaps the user doesn't have the access level) should the field group be displayed or hidden.</translate>
<translate>

===Permissions=== 


This is where you can enter permissions for this field group.</translate> <translate> [[<tvar name=1>J3.x:Access_Control_List_Tutorial</tvar>/en<tvar name=2>#hierarchylevels</tvar>|Learn more.]]</translate>
:[[File:Help-4x-Field-Groups-Edit-permissions-subscreen-<translate> en</translate>.png|600px|none]]
<translate> To change the permissions for this field group, do the following.</translate>
#<translate> Select the '''Group''' by clicking its title located on the left.</translate>
#<translate> Find the desired '''Action'''.</translate>
#*<translate> '''Create'''. Users can create a field group.</translate>
#*<translate> '''Delete'''. Users can delete this field group.</translate>
#*<translate> '''Edit'''. Users can edit this field group.</translate>
#*<translate> '''Edit State'''. User can change the published state and related information for this field group.</translate>
#*<translate> '''Edit Own'''. Users can edit any field group they own.</translate>
#*<translate> '''Edit Custom Field Value.''' Users can edit the field group value.</translate>
#<translate> Select the desired permission for the action you wish to change.</translate>
#*<translate> '''Inherited'''. Inherited for users in this Group from the [[<tvar name=1>Help4.x:Site_Global_Configuration</tvar>/en<tvar name=2>#permissions</tvar>|Global Configuration]], parent group, or category.</translate>
#*<translate> '''Allowed'''. Allowed for users in this Group.</translate>{{-}}<translate> Note: If this action is Denied at one of the higher levels, the Allowed permission here will not take effect. A Denied setting cannot be overridden.</translate>
#*<translate> '''Denied'''. Denied for users in this Group.</translate>
#<translate> Click '''Save''' in '''Toolbar''' at top. When the screen refreshes, the Calculated Setting column will show the effective permission for this Group and Action.</translate>
<translate>

==Toolbar== 


At the top of the page you will see the toolbar shown in the [[<tvar name=1>#screenshot</tvar>|Screenshot]] above.</translate>
*<translate> '''Save'''. Saves the field group and stays in the current screen.</translate>
*<translate> '''Save & Close'''. Saves the field group and closes the current screen.</translate>
**<translate> '''Save & New'''. Saves the field group and keeps the editing screen open and ready to create another field group.</translate>
**<translate> '''Save as Copy'''. Saves your changes to a copy of the current field group. Does not affect the current field group.</translate>
*<translate> '''Close'''. Closes the current screen and returns to the previous screen without saving any modifications you may have made.</translate>
*<translate> '''Help'''. Opens this help screen.</translate>
<translate>

==Quick Tips== 


If you want to know how to use fields: [[<tvar name=1>J3.x:Adding_custom_fields</tvar>/en|Managing Custom Fields]].

==Related Information== 
</translate>
{{:Chunk4x:Help_screen_related_Fields/<translate> en</translate>}}
{{Cathelp|4.0,4.1,4.2,4.3|Content Help Screens|Components Help Screens}}

Help4.x:Fields: Edit

2023-03-31T16:04:02Z

Heelc29:

<noinclude><languages /></noinclude>
<translate>

==Description== 


This is where you can add and edit Fields in Articles, Contacts, and Users.


The helpscreen show as example Users.

==How to Access== 


{{<tvar name=1>rarr</tvar>|Users,Fields}}


To add a Field:</translate>
*<translate> click the '''New''' toolbar button</translate>
<translate> To edit a Field:</translate>
*<translate> Select a '''Title''' from the list</translate>
{{anchor|screenshot}}
<translate>

==Screenshot== 
</translate>
:[[File:Help-4x-Fields-Edit-screen-<translate> en</translate>.png|800px]]<translate>

==Form Fields== 
</translate>
*<translate> '''Title'''. The Title for this field.</translate>
<translate>

===General=== 


'''Left Panel'''


Parameters for all fields:</translate>
*<translate> '''Type'''.</translate> <translate> If you create a field you can choose one of the <tvar name=1>16</tvar> field types. When you save the field this type is permanent.</translate> <translate> [[<tvar name=1>J3.x:Adding_custom_fields/Calendar_Field</tvar>/en|Learn more.]]</translate>
*<translate> '''Name'''.</translate> <translate> The name will be used to identify the field. Leave this blank and Joomla will fill in a default value from the title.</translate>
*<translate> '''Label'''.</translate> <translate> Use a descriptive text of the field for the label of the field. This text is not translatable. If you do not enter any text for a label the title text will also used as label text.</translate>
*<translate> '''Description'''.</translate> <translate> The description of the field. A text that will be shown as a tool tip when the user moves the mouse over the text box while he use it in the Backend creating an article or a contact or a third party component that supports fields. This text is not translatable. You do not see this description in the Frontend.</translate>
*<translate> '''Required'''.</translate> <translate> Is this a mandatory field? In this case the field has to be filled before submitting an article or a contact or a third party component that supports fields.</translate>
<translate> '''Right Panel'''</translate>
*<translate> '''Status'''.</translate> <translate> The published status of this field.</translate>
**<translate> Published:</translate> <translate> The field is visible while editing an article or an contact. And it is visible in the Frontend.</translate>
**<translate> Unpublished:</translate> <translate> The field will not be visible to users while editing an article or an contact.</translate>
**<translate> Archived:</translate> <translate> The field will no longer show on edition an article or an contact. You can open it in [[<tvar name=1>Help4.x:Fields</tvar>/en<tvar name=2>#selectstatus</tvar>|Fields]] when you set the filter to archived.</translate>
**<translate> Trashed:</translate> <translate> The field is deleted but still in the database. It can be permanently deleted from the database in [[<tvar name=1>Help4.x:Fields</tvar>/en<tvar name=2>#selectstatus</tvar>|Fields]] with the Empty Trash function.</translate> <translate> [[<tvar name=1>J4.x:Deleting_an_Article</tvar>/en|Learn more.]]</translate>
*<translate> '''Field Group'''.</translate> <translate> You can assign a field to one or more field groups.</translate>
*<translate> '''Category'''.</translate> <translate> You can assign a field to one or more categories. Note that the default 'All' does not include 'uncategorised' articles.</translate>
*<translate> '''Access'''.</translate> <translate> Select the viewing access level for this field. The access levels depend on what has been set up in [[<tvar name=1>Help4.x:Users:_Viewing_Access_Levels</tvar>/en|Users: Access Levels]].</translate>
*<translate> '''Language'''.</translate> <translate> Select the language for this field. If you are not using the [[<tvar name=1>Help4.x:Extensions:_Languages</tvar>/en|multi-language feature]] of Joomla, keep the default of 'All'.</translate>
*<translate> '''Note'''.</translate> <translate> An optional field to make your personal notes for the field.</translate>
<translate>

===Options=== 
</translate>
:[[File:Help-4x-Fields-Edit-options-subscreen-<translate> en</translate>.png|600px|none]]
<translate> '''Form Options'''</translate>
*<translate> '''Placeholder'''.</translate> <translate> A placeholder text which will appear inside the field as a hint for the input. The placeholder is active in the Backend while creating an article or a contact or a third party component that supports fields. You do do not see it in the Frontend.</translate>
*<translate> '''Field Class'''.</translate> <translate> The class attributes of the field when the field is rendered. If different classes are needed, list them with spaces.</translate>
*<translate> '''Label Class (Form)'''.</translate> <translate> CSS class to apply to the field label when it is in edit mode (entering input into a field).</translate>
*<translate> '''Editable In'''.</translate> <translate> On which part of the site should the field be shown. In the Backend, in the Frontend or both?</translate>
*<translate> '''Showon Attribute'''. Conditionally show or hide the field depending on the value of other fields. The syntax to use here, for example: <code>list-of-items:value1[OR]list-of-items:value2</code></translate>
**<translate>  list-of-items – It is the ''name'' of an already created field on which this field will depends to be show.</translate>
**<translate>  value1 – Is the value need have the field on which it depends to be show.</translate>
**<translate>  [OR] – To create a choice among multiple fields. In the example, this field will show when ''list-of-items'' field have the value: ''value1'' OR ''value2''</translate>
**<translate>  [AND] – To combine multiple fields. This field will show only when ''list-of-items'' field have the value: ''value1'' AND ''value2''</translate>
**<translate>  You can also use value 'does not equal' as in '''list-of-items!:value1'''. The syntax will show this field only when ''list-of-items'' is not equal to ''value1''</translate>
**<translate>  To show this field when ''list-of-items'' field has been selected and have not a empty value, use the syntax ''list-of-items!:'' (without a value specified).</translate>
<translate>
**'''Note:''' Subform fields handle different the identifier ''name'' of ''list-of-items''. If you create a Subform custom field and you add this conditional field you are creating to there, you need use ''field[ID]'' instead of ''list-of-items'', where ID is the id of the field ''list-of-items''. Therefore, the showon attribute for this conditional field you are creating need be:
<code>field36:value1[OR]field36:value2</code> where 36 is the ID of the field 'List of items'.</translate>
*<translate>'''Layout: (Default / Table / Form)''' Subform have this extra form option to select the layout for editing the fields.</translate>

<translate> '''Display Options'''</translate>
*<translate> '''Display Class'''.</translate> <translate> The class of the field container in the output.</translate>
*<translate> '''Value Class'''.</translate> <translate> The class of the field value in the output.</translate>
*<translate> '''Label'''.</translate> <translate> Show the label when the field renders.</translate>
*<translate> '''Label Class (Output)'''.</translate> <translate> CSS class to apply to the field label when it is displayed (displaying the output of a field).</translate>
*<translate> '''Automatic Display'''.</translate> <translate> Joomla offers some content events which are triggered during the content creation process. This is the place to define how the fields should be integrated into content. You can choose</translate>
**<translate> After Title</translate>
**<translate> Before Display Content</translate>
**<translate> After Display Content</translate>
**<translate> Do not automatically display</translate>
*<translate> '''Prefix'''.</translate> <translate> Fixed text to be displayed before a field, for example <tvar name=1>£</tvar>.</translate>
*<translate> '''Suffix'''.</translate> <translate> Fixed text to be displayed after a field, for example <tvar name=1>EUR</tvar>.</translate>
*<translate> '''Layout'''.</translate> <translate> If there is a custom layout then it would be selected here.</translate>
*<translate> '''Display When Read-Only'''.</translate> <translate> If the field is read only (perhaps the user doesn't have the access level) should the field be displayed or hidden.</translate>
<translate>

===Publishing=== 
</translate>
:[[File:Help-4x-Fields-Edit-publishing-subscreen-<translate> en</translate>.png|600px|none]]
*<translate> '''Created Date'''.</translate> <translate> The current time when the field was created. Enter in a different date and time or click on the calendar icon to find the desired date.</translate>
*<translate> '''Created By'''.</translate> <translate> Name of the User who created this field. This will default to the currently logged-in user. If you want to change this to a different user, click the Select User button.</translate>
*<translate> '''Modified Date'''.</translate> <translate> Date of last modification.</translate>
*<translate> '''Modified By'''.</translate> <translate> Username who performed the last modification.</translate>
*<translate> '''ID'''.</translate> <translate> A unique identification number for this field, you cannot change this number. When creating a new field, this field displays <tvar name=1>"0"</tvar> until you save the new entry.</translate>
<translate>

===Permissions=== 


This is where you can enter permissions for this field.</translate> <translate> [[<tvar name=1>J3.x:Access_Control_List_Tutorial</tvar>/en<tvar name=2>#hierarchylevels</tvar>|Learn more.]]</translate>
:[[File:Help-4x-Fields-Edit-permissions-subscreen-<translate> en</translate>.png|600px|none]]
<translate> To change the permissions for this field, do the following.</translate>
#<translate> Select the '''Group''' by clicking its title located on the left.</translate>
#<translate> Find the desired '''Action'''.</translate>
#*<translate> '''Delete'''. Users can delete this field.</translate>
#*<translate> '''Edit'''. Users can edit this field.</translate>
#*<translate> '''Edit State'''. User can change the published state and related information for this field.</translate>
#*<translate> '''Edit Custom Field Value.''' Users can edit the field value.</translate>
#<translate> Select the desired permission for the action you wish to change.</translate>
#*<translate> '''Inherited'''. Inherited for users in this Group from the [[<tvar name=1>Help4.x:Site_Global_Configuration</tvar>/en<tvar name=2>#permissions</tvar>|Global Configuration]], parent group, or category.</translate>
#*<translate> '''Allowed'''. Allowed for users in this Group.</translate>{{-}}<translate> Note: If this action is Denied at one of the higher levels, the Allowed permission here will not take effect. A Denied setting cannot be overridden.</translate>
#*<translate> '''Denied'''. Denied for users in this Group.</translate>
#<translate> Click '''Save''' in '''Toolbar''' at top. When the screen refreshes, the Calculated Setting column will show the effective permission for this Group and Action.</translate>
<translate>

==Toolbar== 


At the top of the page you will see the toolbar shown in the [[<tvar name=1>#screenshot</tvar>|Screenshot]] above.</translate>
*<translate> '''Save'''. Saves the field and stays in the current screen.</translate>
*<translate> '''Save & Close'''. Saves the field and closes the current screen.</translate>
**<translate> '''Save & New'''. Saves the field and keeps the editing screen open and ready to create another field.</translate>
**<translate> '''Save as Copy'''. Saves your changes to a copy of the current field. Does not affect the current field.</translate>
*<translate> '''Close'''. Closes the current screen and returns to the previous screen without saving any modifications you may have made.</translate>
*<translate> '''Help'''. Opens this help screen.</translate>
<translate>

==Quick Tips== 


If you want to know how to use fields: [[<tvar name=1>J3.x:Adding_custom_fields</tvar>/en|Managing Custom Fields]].

==Related Information== 
</translate>
{{:Chunk4x:Help_screen_related_Fields/<translate> en</translate>}}
{{Cathelp|4.0,4.1,4.2,4.3|Content Help Screens|Components Help Screens}}

Help4.x:Fields

2023-03-31T16:03:39Z

Heelc29: Category Help screen

<noinclude><languages /></noinclude>
<translate>

==Description== 


Fields are used to display additional attributes of Articles, Contacts and Users. The data are entered in the Backend and displayed in the Frontend.


The helpscreen show as example Articles.

==How to Access== 


{{<tvar name=1>rarr</tvar>|Content,Fields}}


To add a Field:</translate>
#<translate> select from the dropdown list:</translate>
#*<translate> Articles</translate>
#*<translate> Category</translate>
#<translate> click the '''New''' toolbar button</translate>
<translate> To edit a Field:</translate>
*<translate> Select a '''Title''' from the list</translate>
{{anchor|screenshot}}
<translate>

==Screenshot== 
</translate>
:[[File:Help-4x-Fields-screen-<translate> en</translate>.png|800px]]
<translate>

==Column Headers== 
</translate>
*<translate> '''Checkbox'''. Check this box to select fields. To select all fields, check the box in the column heading. After boxes are checked the toolbar button 'Actions' get active.</translate>
*{{anchor|ordering}}<translate> '''Ordering'''. You can change the order of an field within a list as follows:</translate>
**<translate> Select the Ordering icon [[<tvar name=1>File:Help-4x-Ordering-colheader-icon.png|9px|</tvar>|Ordering icon]] in the List heading to make it active.</translate>
**<translate> Select one of the Three dots icons [[<tvar name=1>File:Help-4x-Ordering-colheader-grab-bar-icon.png|5px||</tvar>|Three dots icon]] and drag it up or down to change the position of that row in the list.</translate>
**<translate> In the Filter Options you may limit the list to fields that are assigned for example to a Language.</translate>
*<translate> '''Status'''. Status of field. Hover icon for informations.</translate>
*<translate> '''Title'''. The title of the field. Edit the field by clicking on the Title.</translate>
*<translate> '''Type'''. The Type of the field.</translate> <translate> [[<tvar name=1>J3.x:Adding_custom_fields/Calendar_Field</tvar>/en|Learn more.]]</translate>
*<translate> '''Field Group.''' The Field Group this field belongs to.</translate>
*<translate> '''Access'''. The viewing [[<tvar name=1>Help4.x:Users:_Viewing_Access_Levels</tvar>/en|Access Level]] for this field.</translate>
*<translate> '''Language'''. Fields language, default is 'All'.</translate>
*<translate> '''ID'''. A unique identification number for this field, you cannot change this number.</translate>
<translate>

==List Filters== 


'''Search bar'''. Near the top of the page you will see the search bar shown in the [[<tvar name=1>#screenshot</tvar>|Screenshot]] above.</translate>
*<translate> '''Search by Text'''. Enter part of the search term and click the Search icon. ''Hover'' to see a ''Tooltip'' indicating which fields will be searched.</translate>{{-}}<translate> To 'Search by ID' enter <tvar name=1>"id:x"</tvar>, where <tvar name=2>"x"</tvar> is the ID number (for example, <tvar name=3>"id:19"</tvar>).</translate>
*<translate> '''Filter Options'''. Click to display the additional filters.</translate>
*<translate> '''Clear'''. Click to clear the Filter field and restore the list to its unfiltered state.</translate>
*<translate> '''Ordering'''. Shows the current list ordering field. 2 ways to change the order:</translate>
**<translate> Select from the dropdown list. Ordering may be in ascending or descending order.</translate>
**<translate> Click a column heading. The column heading toggles between ascending and descending order.</translate>
*<translate> '''Number to Display'''. Shows the number of fields in a list. Select from the dropdown list to change the number displayed.</translate>{{-}}<translate> The default for a site is <tvar name=1>'20'</tvar> but this may be changed in the [[<tvar name=2>Help4.x:Site_Global_Configuration</tvar>/en<tvar name=3>#defaultlistlimit</tvar>|Global Configuration]].</translate>
<translate>

===Filter Options=== 


Near the top of the page you will see the filter bar shown in the [[<tvar name=1>#screenshot</tvar>|Screenshot]] above.</translate>
{{anchor|selectstatus}}
*<translate> '''Select Status'''. Select from Trashed / Unpublished / Published / Archived / All.</translate>
*<translate> '''Select Field Group'''. Select from the list of available field groups.</translate>
*<translate> '''Select Assigned Category'''. Select from the list of available assigned categories.</translate>
*<translate> '''Select Access'''. Select from the list of available viewing access levels.</translate>
*<translate> '''Select Language'''. Select from the list of available languages.</translate>
*<translate> '''Only Use In Subform'''. Select from the list Yes or No.</translate>
<translate>

===Pagination=== 


'''Page Controls'''. When the number of fields is more than one page, you will see a page control bar near the bottom of the page shown in the [[<tvar name=1>#screenshot</tvar>|Screenshot]] above. The current page number being viewed has a dark colour background.</translate>
*<translate> '''Start'''. Click to go to the first page.</translate>
*<translate> '''Prev'''. Click to go to the previous page.</translate>
*<translate> '''Page numbers'''. Click to go to the desired page.</translate>
*<translate> '''Next'''. Click to go to the next page.</translate>
*<translate> '''End'''. Click to go to the last page.</translate>
<translate>

==Toolbar== 


At the top of the page you will see the toolbar shown in the [[<tvar name=1>#screenshot</tvar>|Screenshot]] above.</translate>
*<translate> '''New'''. Opens the editing screen to create a new field.</translate>
*<translate> '''Actions'''. Reveals a list of actions for selected fields. Check one or more fields checkboxes to activate the list.</translate>
**<translate> '''Publish'''. Makes the selected fields available to visitors to your website.</translate>
**<translate> '''Unpublish'''. Makes the selected fields unavailable to visitors to your website.</translate>
**<translate> '''Archive'''. Changes the status of the selected fields to indicate that they are archived.</translate> <translate> [[<tvar name=1>J4.x:How_to_Archive_an_Article</tvar>/en|Learn more.]]</translate>
**<translate> '''Check-In'''. Checks-in the selected fields.</translate>
**<translate> '''Trash'''. Changes the status of the selected fields to indicate that they are trashed.</translate> <translate> [[<tvar name=1>J4.x:Deleting_an_Article</tvar>/en|Learn more.]]</translate>
**<translate> '''Batch'''. Batch processes the selected fields.</translate>
*<translate> '''Options'''. Opens [[<tvar name=1>Help4.x:Articles:_Options</tvar>/en|Articles: Options]].</translate>
*<translate> '''Help'''. Opens this help screen.</translate>
<translate>

==Batch Process== 


The Batch Process allows a change in settings for a group of selected fields.</translate>

:[[File:Help-4x-Fields-batch-subscreen-<translate> en</translate>.png|600px]]

<translate> '''How to Batch Process''' a group of fields:</translate>
#<translate> Select one or more fields on the list by checking the desired checkboxes.</translate>
#<translate> Click the Batch Toolbar button.</translate>
#<translate> Set one or more of the following values:</translate>
#*<translate> To change the '''Language''', select the desired language from the Set Language list box.</translate>
#*<translate> To change the '''Access Levels''', select the desired new access level from the Set Access Level list box.</translate>
#*<translate> To change the '''Category''', select a category. To leave the category unchanged, use the default value of 'Select'.</translate>
#**<translate> To '''copy''' the fields to a different category, select the desired category from the category list box and check the Copy option. In this case, the original fields are unchanged and the copies are assigned to the new category and, if selected, the new language, and access level.</translate>
#**<translate> To '''move''' the fields to a different category, select the desired category from the category list box and check the Move option. In this case, the original fields will be moved to a new category and, if selected, be assigned the new language, and access level.</translate>
#<translate> When all of the settings are entered, click on Process to perform the changes. A message '''"Batch process completed successfully."''' will show.</translate>
<translate>

==Quick Tips== 


If you want to know how to use fields: [[<tvar name=1>J3.x:Adding_custom_fields</tvar>/en|Managing Custom Fields]].

==Related Information== 
</translate>
{{:Chunk4x:Help_screen_related_Fields/<translate> en</translate>}}
{{Cathelp|4.0,4.1,4.2,4.3|Article Manager Help Screens|Content Help Screens}}

Help4.x:Field Groups

2023-03-31T16:03:10Z

Heelc29: Category Help screen

<noinclude><languages /></noinclude>
<translate>

==Description== 


The Field Groups screen is used to list, add and edit Field Groups.


Field Groups help to organise fields for data entry. Each Group will appear as a separate Tab in the data entry form.


The helpscreen show as example Contacts.

==How to Access== 


{{<tvar name=1>rarr</tvar>|Components,Contacts,Field Groups}}


To add a Field Group:</translate>
#<translate> select from the dropdown list:</translate>
#*<translate> Contact</translate>
#*<translate> Mail</translate>
#*<translate> Category</translate>
#<translate> click the '''New''' toolbar button</translate>
<translate> To edit a Field Group:</translate>
*<translate> Select a '''Title''' from the list</translate>
{{anchor|screenshot}}
<translate>

==Screenshot== 
</translate>
:[[File:Help-4x-Field-Groups-screen-<translate> en</translate>.png|800px]]
<translate>

==Column Headers== 
</translate>
*<translate> '''Checkbox'''. Check this box to select field groups. To select all field groups, check the box in the column heading. After boxes are checked the toolbar button 'Actions' get active.</translate>
*{{anchor|ordering}}<translate> '''Ordering'''. You can change the order of an field group within a list as follows:</translate>
**<translate> Select the Ordering icon [[<tvar name=1>File:Help-4x-Ordering-colheader-icon.png|9px|</tvar>|Ordering icon]] in the List heading to make it active.</translate>
**<translate> Select one of the Three dots icons [[<tvar name=1>File:Help-4x-Ordering-colheader-grab-bar-icon.png|5px||</tvar>|Three dots icon]] and drag it up or down to change the position of that row in the list.</translate>
**<translate> In the Filter Options you may limit the list to field groups that are assigned for example to a Language.</translate>
*<translate> '''Status'''. Status of field group. Hover icon for informations.</translate>
*<translate> '''Title'''. The title of the field group. Edit the field group by clicking on the Title.</translate>
*<translate> '''Access'''. The viewing [[<tvar name=1>Help4.x:Users:_Viewing_Access_Levels</tvar>/en|Access Level]] for this field group.</translate>
*<translate> '''Language'''. Field groups language, default is 'All'.</translate>
*<translate> '''ID'''. A unique identification number for this field group, you cannot change this number.</translate>
<translate>

==List Filters== 


'''Search bar'''. Near the top of the page you will see the search bar shown in the [[<tvar name=1>#screenshot</tvar>|Screenshot]] above.</translate>
*<translate> '''Search by Text'''. Enter part of the search term and click the Search icon. ''Hover'' to see a ''Tooltip'' indicating which fields will be searched.</translate>{{-}}<translate> To 'Search by ID' enter <tvar name=1>"id:x"</tvar>, where <tvar name=2>"x"</tvar> is the ID number (for example, <tvar name=3>"id:19"</tvar>).</translate>
*<translate> '''Filter Options'''. Click to display the additional filters.</translate>
*<translate> '''Clear'''. Click to clear the Filter field and restore the list to its unfiltered state.</translate>
*<translate> '''Ordering'''. Shows the current list ordering field. 2 ways to change the order:</translate>
**<translate> Select from the dropdown list. Ordering may be in ascending or descending order.</translate>
**<translate> Click a column heading. The column heading toggles between ascending and descending order.</translate>
*<translate> '''Number to Display'''. Shows the number of field groups in a list. Select from the dropdown list to change the number displayed.</translate>{{-}}<translate> The default for a site is <tvar name=1>'20'</tvar> but this may be changed in the [[<tvar name=2>Help4.x:Site_Global_Configuration</tvar>/en<tvar name=3>#defaultlistlimit</tvar>|Global Configuration]].</translate>
<translate>
===Filter Options=== 


Near the top of the page you will see the filter bar shown in the [[<tvar name=1>#screenshot</tvar>|Screenshot]] above.</translate>
{{anchor|selectstatus}}
*<translate> '''Select Status'''. Select from Trashed / Unpublished / Published / Archived / All.</translate>
*<translate> '''Select Access'''. Select from the list of available viewing access levels.</translate>
*<translate> '''Select Language'''. Select from the list of available languages.</translate>
<translate>

===Pagination=== 


'''Page Controls'''. When the number of field groups is more than one page, you will see a page control bar near the bottom of the page shown in the [[<tvar name=1>#screenshot</tvar>|Screenshot]] above. The current page number being viewed has a dark colour background.</translate>
*<translate> '''Start'''. Click to go to the first page.</translate>
*<translate> '''Prev'''. Click to go to the previous page.</translate>
*<translate> '''Page numbers'''. Click to go to the desired page.</translate>
*<translate> '''Next'''. Click to go to the next page.</translate>
*<translate> '''End'''. Click to go to the last page.</translate>
<translate>

==Toolbar== 


At the top of the page you will see the toolbar shown in the [[<tvar name=1>#screenshot</tvar>|Screenshot]] above.</translate>
*<translate> '''New'''. Opens the editing screen to create a new field group.</translate>
*<translate> '''Actions'''. Reveals a list of actions for selected field groups. Check one or more field groups checkboxes to activate the list.</translate>
**<translate> '''Publish'''. Makes the selected field groups available to visitors to your website.</translate>
**<translate> '''Unpublish'''. Makes the selected field groups unavailable to visitors to your website.</translate>
**<translate> '''Archive'''. Changes the status of the selected field groups to indicate that they are archived.</translate> <translate> [[<tvar name=1>J4.x:How_to_Archive_an_Article</tvar>/en|Learn more.]]</translate>
**<translate> '''Check-In'''. Checks-in the selected field groups.</translate>
**<translate> '''Trash'''. Changes the status of the selected field groups to indicate that they are trashed.</translate> <translate> [[<tvar name=1>J4.x:Deleting_an_Article</tvar>/en|Learn more.]]</translate>
**<translate> '''Batch'''. Batch processes the selected field groups.</translate>
*<translate> '''Options'''. Opens [[<tvar name=1>Help4.x:Articles:_Options</tvar>/en|Articles: Options]].</translate>
*<translate> '''Help'''. Opens this help screen.</translate>
<translate>

==Batch Process== 


The Batch Process allows a change in settings for a group of selected field groups.</translate>

:[[File:Help-4x-Field-Groups-batch-subscreen-<translate> en</translate>.png|600px]]

<translate> '''How to Batch Process''' a group of field groups:</translate>
#<translate> Select one or more field groups on the list by checking the desired checkboxes.</translate>
#<translate> Click the Batch Toolbar button.</translate>
#<translate> Set one or more of the following values:</translate>
#*<translate> To change the '''Language''', select the desired language from the Set Language list box.</translate>
#*<translate> To change the '''Access Levels''', select the desired new access level from the Set Access Level list box.</translate>
#<translate> When all of the settings are entered, click on Process to perform the changes. A message '''"Batch process completed successfully."''' will show.</translate>
<translate>

==Quick Tips== 


If you want to know how to use fields: [[<tvar name=1>J3.x:Adding_custom_fields</tvar>/en|Managing Custom Fields]].

==Related Information== 
</translate>
{{:Chunk4x:Help_screen_related_Fields/<translate> en</translate>}}
{{Cathelp|4.0,4.1,4.2,4.3|Content Help Screens|Components Help Screens}}

Help4.x:News Feeds: Edit Category

2023-03-31T15:58:20Z

Heelc29: Category Help screen

<noinclude><languages /></noinclude>
<translate>

==Description== 


The News Feeds Edit/New Category screen allows administrators to create or edit News Feed Categories for better organisation of multiple News Feeds.


''You must have at least one category before you can create any News Feeds!''

==How to Access== 
</translate>
*<translate> Select {{rarr|Components,News Feeds,Categories}} from the Administrator menu. Then ...</translate>
**<translate> Select the '''New''' Toolbar button to create a new category.</translate>
**<translate> Select a title link in the '''Title''' column to edit an existing category.</translate>
<translate>

==Screenshot== 
</translate>
:[[File:Help-4x-Components-Newsfeeds-Categories-Edit-screen-<translate> en</translate>.png|800px]]
{{anchor|content}}
<translate>

==Form Fields== 
</translate>
*<translate> '''Title.''' The Name of the News Feed. This field is required.</translate>
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Alias/<translate> en</translate>}}
{{:Chunk4x:Add Category Details/<translate> en</translate>}}{{anchor|options}}{{:Chunk4x:Add Category Options/<translate> en</translate>}}
{{anchor|publishing}}
<translate>

===Publishing Options=== 


This section shows Publishing Options parameters for this Category, as shown below when tab is clicked: </translate>
:[[File:Help-4x-Categories-Edit-screen-publish-options-tab-<translate> en</translate>.png|600px]]

<translate> The grayed out fields are for information only and may not be edited.</translate>
*<translate> '''Created Date.''' Date the item(Article, Category, Weblink, etc.) was created.</translate>
*<translate> '''Created by.''' Optional, choose from a popup window of users. Select User by clicking on the user's name. Defaults to user creating new category if left blank.</translate>
*<translate> '''Modified Date.''' ''(Informative only)'' Date of last modification.</translate>
*<translate> '''Modified By.''' ''(Informative only)'' Username who performed the last modification.</translate>
*<translate> '''Hits.''' Number of hits on a Category view.</translate>
*<translate> '''ID.''' The unique ID number automatically assigned to this item by Joomla!. This number cannot be changed.</translate>
*<translate> '''Meta Description.''' An optional paragraph to be used as the description of the page in the HTML output. This will generally display in the results of search engines. If entered, this creates an HTML meta element with a name attribute of "description" and a content attribute equal to the entered text.</translate>
*<translate> '''Meta Keywords.''' Optional entry for keywords. Must be entered separated by commas (for example, "cats, dogs, pets") and may be entered in upper or lower case. (For example, "CATS" will match "cats" or "Cats"). Keywords can be used in several ways:</translate>
**<translate> To help Search Engines and other systems classify the content of the Article.</translate>
**<translate> In combination with Banner tags, to display specific Banners based on the Article content. For example, say you have one Banner with an ad for dog products and another Banner for cat products. You can have your dog Banner display when a User is viewing a dog-related Article and your cat Banner display for a cat-related Article. To do this, you would:</translate>
***<translate> Add the keywords 'dog' and 'cat' to the appropriate Articles.</translate>
***<translate> Add the Tags 'dog' and 'cat' to the appropriate Banners in the [[Help40:Banners:_Edit/en|Banner Manager New/Edit]] screen.</translate>
***<translate> Set the Banner module Parameter 'Search By Tags' to 'Yes in the [[Help40:Site_Modules:_Banners/en|Banner Module Edit]] screen.</translate>
**<translate> For articles only, in combination with the [[Help40:Site_Modules:_Articles_-_Related/en|Related Articles]] module, to display Articles that share at least one keyword in common. For example, if the current Article displayed has the keywords "cats, dogs, monkeys", any other Articles with at least one of these keywords will show in the Related Articles module.</translate>
*<translate> '''Author.''' Optional entry for an Author name within the metadata. If entered, this creates an HTML meta element with the name attribute of "author" and the content attribute as entered here.</translate>
*<translate> '''Robots.''' The instructions for web "robots" that browse to this page.</translate>
**<translate> ''Use Global'': Use the value set in the Component→Options for this component.</translate>
**<translate> ''Index, Follow'': Index this page and follow the links on this page.</translate>
**<translate> ''No index, Follow'': Do not index this page, but still follow the links on the page. For example, you might do this for a site map page where you want the links to be indexed but you don't want this page to show in search engines.</translate>
**<translate> ''Index, No follow'': Index this page, but do not follow any links on the page. For example, you might want to do this for an events calendar, where you want the page to show in search engines but you do not want to index each event.</translate>
**<translate> ''No index, no follow'': Do not index this page or follow any links on the page.</translate>
{{anchor|associations}}
<translate>

===Associations=== 


This shows Associations for this Category, as shown below when tab is clicked: </translate>

:[[File:Help-4x-Categories-Edit-screen-associations-tab-<translate> en</translate>.png|600px]]
{{Chunk4x:colheader|Select Category For Associations/<translate> en</translate>}}
{{anchor|permissions}}
<translate>

===Permissions=== 


This section shows permissions for this category. The screen shows as follows.</translate>

:[[File:Help-4x-Categories-Edit-screen-permissions-tab-<translate> en</translate>.png|600px]]

{{Chunk4x:Change_Permissions/<translate> en</translate>}}
<translate>

==Toolbar== 
</translate>
{{:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_top_descriptor/<translate> en</translate>}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Save/<translate> en</translate>|<translate> category</translate>}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_SaveAndClose/<translate> en</translate>|<translate> category</translate>}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_SaveAndNew/<translate> en</translate>|<translate> category</translate>}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_SaveAsCopy/<translate> en</translate>|<translate> category</translate>}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Cancel/<translate> en</translate>}} <translate>

Or</translate>
{{:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Close/<translate> en</translate>}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Help/<translate> en</translate>}}
<translate>

==Related Information== 


To work with News Feeds: [[Help40:News_Feeds/en|News Feeds]]</translate>

{{Cathelp|4.0,4.1,4.2,4.3|News Feed Manager Helps Screens|Components Help Screens}}

Help4.x:News Feeds: Edit

2023-03-31T15:57:55Z

Heelc29: Category Help screen

<noinclude><languages /></noinclude>
<translate>

==Description== 


This is where you add a new News Feed or edit an existing one. Note that you need to create at least one [[Help40:Components_Newsfeeds_Categories/en|News Feed Category]] before you can create your first News Feed.

==How to Access== 
</translate>
*<translate> Select {{rarr|Components,News Feeds, Feeds}} from the Administrator menu. Then ...</translate>
**<translate> To add a new News Feed, select the '''New''' icon in the toolbar.</translate>
**<translate> To edit an existing News Feed, select the News Feed's title link in the list '''Title''' column.</translate>
<translate>

==Screenshot== 
</translate>
[[File:Help-4x-Components-Newsfeeds-Feeds-Edit-screen-<translate> en</translate>.png|800px]]
<translate>

==Form Fields== 
</translate>
*<translate> '''Title.''' The Name of the News Feed. This field is required.</translate>
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Alias/<translate> en</translate>}}
{{anchor|content}}
<translate>

===Edit News Feed Tab=== 


'''Left Panel'''</translate>
*<translate> '''Link.''' The link of this News Feed. This should normally begin with <nowiki>"https://"</nowiki>.</translate>
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Description/<translate> en</translate>}}
:[[File:Help30-editor-tinymce-advanced-module-article-image-<translate> en</translate>.png|center|800px]]
*<translate> Select the '''Insert''' dropdown list to add the following with a popup window:</translate>
**<translate> '''Article.'''</translate>
**<translate> '''Image.'''</translate>
*<translate> '''Toggle Editor.''' Turns on or off the editor's description box WYSIWYG features to show HTML markup.</translate>
<translate> '''Right Panel'''</translate>
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header State/<translate> en</translate>}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Category/<translate> en</translate>}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Access/<translate> en</translate>}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Language/<translate> en</translate>}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Tags/<translate> en</translate>}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Version Note/<translate> en</translate>}}
{{anchor|options}}
<translate>

===Options Tab=== 
</translate>
:[[File:Help-4x-Components-Newsfeeds-Edit-tab-images-options-<translate> en</translate>.png|800px]]

<translate> '''Images Panel'''</translate>
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Feed First Image/<translate> en</translate>}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Feed First Image Float/<translate> en</translate>}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Alt text/<translate> en</translate>}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Caption/<translate> en</translate>}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Feed Second Image/<translate> en</translate>}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Feed Second Image Float/<translate> en</translate>}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Alt text/<translate> en</translate>}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Caption/<translate> en</translate>}}

<translate> '''Display Panel'''</translate>
*<translate> '''Number of Articles.''' The number of articles from the news feed to display on the page.</translate>
*<translate> '''Cache Time.''' The number of minutes before the system checks for new content from the news feed source.</translate>
*<translate> '''Language Direction.''' Whether the language for this feed reads from left to right or right to left.</translate>
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Feed Image/<translate> en</translate>}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Feed Description/<translate> en</translate>}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Feed Content/<translate> en</translate>}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Characters count/<translate> en</translate>}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Layout/<translate> en</translate>}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Feed Display Order/<translate> en</translate>}}
{{anchor|publishing}}
<translate>

===Publishing=== 
</translate>
:[[File:Help-4x-Components-Newsfeeds-Edit-tab-publishing-options-<translate> en</translate>.png|800px]]

<translate> '''Publishing Panel'''</translate>
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Start Publishing/<translate> en</translate>}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Finish Publishing/<translate> en</translate>}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Enter Created Date/<translate> en</translate>}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Enter Created By/<translate> en</translate>}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Enter Created By Alias/<translate> en</translate>}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Modified Date/<translate> en</translate>}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Modified By/<translate> en</translate>}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Revision/<translate> en</translate>}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Id/<translate> en</translate>}}

<translate> '''Metadata Panel'''</translate>
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Metadata Description/<translate> en</translate>}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Metadata Keywords/<translate> en</translate>}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header External Reference/<translate> en</translate>}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Metadata Robots/<translate> en</translate>}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Content Help Screens Rights/<translate> en</translate>}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Hits/<translate> en</translate>}}
{{anchor|associations}}
<translate>

===Associations=== 
</translate>
:[[File:Help-4x-Components-Newsfeeds-Edit-tab-associations-options-<translate> en</translate>.png|600px]]
{{:Chunk4x:Help screen column header Select Feed For Associations/<translate> en</translate>}}
<translate>

==Toolbar== </translate>
{{:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_top_descriptor/<translate> en</translate>}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Save/<translate> en</translate>|<translate> news feed</translate>}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_SaveAndClose/<translate> en</translate>|<translate> news feed</translate>}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_SaveAndNew/<translate> en</translate>|<translate> news feed</translate>}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_SaveAsCopy/<translate> en</translate>|<translate> news feed</translate>}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Cancel/<translate> en</translate>}} <translate> Or</translate>
{{:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Close/<translate> en</translate>}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Versions/<translate> en</translate>}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Associations/<translate> en</translate>|user}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Help/<translate> en</translate>|user}}
<translate>

==Quick Tips== 


A News Feed category must be added ''before'' any News Feed can be created.</translate>
<translate>

==Related Information== 


To add or edit News Feed Categories: [[Help40:News_Feeds:_Categories/en|News Feeds: Categories]]</translate>

{{Cathelp|4.0,4.1,4.2,4.3|News Feed Manager Helps Screens|Components Help Screens}}

Help4.x:Contacts: Edit Category

2023-03-31T15:56:26Z

Heelc29: Category Help screen

<noinclude><languages /></noinclude>
<translate>

==Description== 
</translate>
<translate>

Contact Categories allow you to organize contacts in your web site. Contact Categories are separate from other types of Categories, such as those for Articles, Banners, News Feeds, and so on.</translate>
<translate>

==How to Access== 
</translate>
*<translate> Select {{rarr|Components,Contacts,Categories}} from the Administrator menu. Then...</translate>
**<translate> Select the '''New''' button in Toolbar to create a new category. Or...</translate>
**<translate> Select a category title in the Title column to '''Edit''' an existing category.</translate>
<translate>

==Screenshot== 
</translate>
:[[File:Help-4x-Components-Contact-Categories-Edit-screen-<translate> en</translate>.png|800px]]
<translate>

==Form Fields== 
</translate>
{{Chunk4x:colheader|Enter Title/<translate> en</translate>}}
{{Chunk4x:colheader|Alias/<translate> en</translate>}}
{{anchor|content}}
<translate>

===Category Tab=== 
</translate>
<translate>

'''Left Panel'''
</translate>
{{Chunk4x:colheader|Description/<translate> en</translate>}}

<translate>

'''Right Panel'''
</translate>
*<translate> '''Parent.''' The item (category, menu item, and so on) that is the parent of the item being edited.</translate>
*<translate> '''Status.''' (Published/Unpublished/Archived/Trashed) The published status of the item.</translate>
*<translate> '''Access Level.''' Who has access to this item. Default options are:</translate>
**<translate> '''Public:''' Everyone has access</translate>
**<translate> '''Guest:''' Everyone has access</translate>
**<translate> '''Registered:''' Only registered users have access</translate>
**<translate> '''Special:''' Only users with author status or higher have access</translate>
**<translate> '''Super Users:''' Only super users have access</translate>
***<translate> Enter the desired level using the dropdown list box. Custom Access Control Levels created will show if they exist.</translate>
*<translate> '''Language.''' Item language.</translate>
*<translate> '''Tags.''' Enter one or more optional tags for this item. You can select existing tags by entering in the first few letters. You may also create new tags by entering them here. Tags allow you to see lists of related items across content types (for example, articles, contacts, and categories).</translate>
*<translate> '''Note.''' Item note. This is normally for the site administrator's use (for example, to document information about this item) and does not show in the front end of the site.</translate>
*<translate> '''Version Note.''' Optional field to identify this version of the item in the item's [[Help40:Components_Version_History/en|Version History]] window.</translate>
{{anchor|options}}
<translate>

===Options Tab=== 
</translate>
:[[File:Help-4x-Categories-Edit-screen-options-tab-<translate> en</translate>.png|600px]]
*<translate> '''Layout.''' Use a different layout from the supplied components view or overrides in the templates.</translate>
*<translate> '''Image.''' Choose an image to be displayed with this item/category in the front-end.</translate>
*<translate> '''Alt Text.''' Alternative text used for visitors without access to images.</translate>
{{anchor|publishing}}
<translate>

===Publishing Tab=== 
</translate>
:[[File:Help-4x-Categories-Edit-screen-publish-options-tab-<translate> en</translate>.png|600px]]

<translate> The grayed out fields are for information only and may not be edited.</translate>
*<translate> '''Created Date.''' Date the item(Article, Category, Weblink, etc.) was created.</translate>
*<translate> '''Created by.''' Optional, choose from a popup window of users. Select User by clicking on the user's name. Defaults to user creating new category if left blank.</translate>
*<translate> '''Modified Date.''' ''(Informative only)'' Date of last modification.</translate>
*<translate> '''Modified By.''' ''(Informative only)'' Username who performed the last modification.</translate>
*<translate> '''Hits.''' Number of hits on a Category view.</translate>
*<translate> '''ID.''' The unique ID number automatically assigned to this item by Joomla!. This number cannot be changed.</translate>
*<translate> '''Meta Description.''' An optional paragraph to be used as the description of the page in the HTML output. This will generally display in the results of search engines. If entered, this creates an HTML meta element with a name attribute of "description" and a content attribute equal to the entered text.</translate>
*<translate> '''Meta Keywords.''' Optional entry for keywords. Must be entered separated by commas (for example, "cats, dogs, pets") and may be entered in upper or lower case. (For example, "CATS" will match "cats" or "Cats"). Keywords can be used in several ways:</translate>
**<translate> To help Search Engines and other systems classify the content of the Article.</translate>
**<translate> In combination with Banner tags, to display specific Banners based on the Article content. For example, say you have one Banner with an ad for dog products and another Banner for cat products. You can have your dog Banner display when a User is viewing a dog-related Article and your cat Banner display for a cat-related Article. To do this, you would:</translate>
***<translate> Add the keywords 'dog' and 'cat' to the appropriate Articles.</translate>
***<translate> Add the Tags 'dog' and 'cat' to the appropriate Banners in the [[Help40:Banners:_Edit/en|Banner Manager New/Edit]] screen.</translate>
***<translate> Set the Banner module Parameter 'Search By Tags' to 'Yes in the [[Help40:Site_Modules:_Banners/en|Banner Module Edit]] screen.</translate>
**<translate> For articles only, in combination with the [[Help40:Site_Modules:_Articles_-_Related/en|Related Articles]] module, to display Articles that share at least one keyword in common. For example, if the current Article displayed has the keywords "cats, dogs, monkeys", any other Articles with at least one of these keywords will show in the Related Articles module.</translate>
*<translate> '''Author.''' Optional entry for an Author name within the metadata. If entered, this creates an HTML meta element with the name attribute of "author" and the content attribute as entered here.</translate>
*<translate> '''Robots.''' The instructions for web "robots" that browse to this page.</translate>
**<translate> ''Use Global'': Use the value set in the Component→Options for this component.</translate>
**<translate> ''Index, Follow'': Index this page and follow the links on this page.</translate>
**<translate> ''No index, Follow'': Do not index this page, but still follow the links on the page. For example, you might do this for a site map page where you want the links to be indexed but you don't want this page to show in search engines.</translate>
**<translate> ''Index, No follow'': Index this page, but do not follow any links on the page. For example, you might want to do this for an events calendar, where you want the page to show in search engines but you do not want to index each event.</translate>
**<translate> ''No index, no follow'': Do not index this page or follow any links on the page.</translate>
{{anchor|associations}}
<translate>

===Associations Tab=== 
</translate>
:[[File:Help-4x-Categories-Edit-screen-publish-associations-tab-<translate> en</translate>.png|600px]]
{{anchor|permissions}}
<translate>

===Permissions Tab=== 
</translate>
:[[File:Help-4x-Categories-Edit-screen-permissions-tab-<translate> en</translate>.png|600px]]
{{Chunk4x:Change_Permissions/<translate> en</translate>}}
<translate>

==Toolbar== 
</translate>
{{:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_top_descriptor/<translate> en</translate>}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Save/<translate> en</translate>}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_SaveAndClose/<translate> en</translate>}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_SaveAndNew/<translate> en</translate>}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_SaveAsCopy/<translate> en</translate>}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Cancel/<translate> en</translate>}} <translate> Or</translate>
{{:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Close/<translate> en</translate>}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Versions/<translate> en</translate>}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Associations/<translate> en</translate>}}
{{:Chunk4x:Help_screen_toolbar_icon_Help/<translate> en</translate>}}
<translate>

==Related Information== 


To find and edit existing Contacts: [[Help40:Contacts/en|Contact Manager]].</translate>

{{Cathelp|4.0,4.1,4.2,4.3|Contact Manager Help Screens|Components Help Screens}}